Home

2013 Nissan Pathfinder

1. LDI2035 Extended storage switch If any electrical equipment does not operate remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse NOTE The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage Even if the ex tended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse How to replace the extended storage switch 1 To remove the extended storage switch be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position 3 Remove the fuse box cover 4 Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the storage switch Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box BATTERY REPLACEMENT A CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts SDI1867 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol lows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2025 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery a
2. tees Lr Hey EN mae p d iy We cA V SSS0016 AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Children should be properly re strained in the rear seat and if appro priate in a child restraint 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING e The seat belt should be properly ad justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly SS0014 AWARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder e Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously w
3. S S 5 4 3 LHA1300 HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Clock key then select the Time Zone key 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Pacific time zone Mountain time zone etc 3 UP DOWN Movement Indicator Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move UP DOWN on the screen and select more options 4 Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for that screen for example 1 9 5 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Manually set the time zone HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio climate control system and fuel consumption press the STATUS button The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pressed multiple times Audio Audio and climate control system Audio and fuel consumption Audio 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 12 00 Information Hal
4. tuning buttons For AM or FM Press the SEEK CAT 44 button or the TRACK gt button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station For XM Press the SEEK CAT M4 button or the TRACK gt i button to go to the first channel of the previous or next category SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this five second pe riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Six stations can be set for the AM band Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 Eighteen channels can be set for the SAT radio 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XM3 if so equipped Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button or choose the satellite band XM1 XM2 or XM3 using the SAT button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly muted 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man
5. 2 28 3 4 5 13 Three way catalyst 0 eee eee 5 2 Tire Flat tires ce aser seb Rw ew Ae ee 6 3 Sparetire 000 6 4 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Tire chains ss amra sa eee ee ee 8 37 Wire placard ane s hte ceed ES 9 11 Tire pressure ouuu 8 30 Tirerotation asie ee ae a 8 37 Tires of 4 wheel drive 8 39 Types of tires ges gie mia aes sl d 8 36 Uniform tire quality grading 9 29 Wheels andtires 0 0 8 30 Wheel tire size 2 ee ee 9 8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Top tether strap child restraint 1 34 Towing 4 wheel drive models 6 13 Flat towing i o eG baa ewe ee a 9 28 Towing load specification 9 21 Tow truck towing 00 6 12 Trailertowing 00 0008 9 17 Tow mode switch 1 0 0 00 000 2 42 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 59 2 63 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid oye cee eee tered 8 11 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Travel See registering your vehicle in another COUN 2 62 te ee tebe ea be Bee 9 9 Trip odometer s s sss dior ros ti Katso 2 4 Turn signal switch 00 2 35 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 29 USB interface Audio file operation 4 98 4 100 Video file operation 0 4 101 v Vanity mirror
6. LHA1253 Switch beeps With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed 12 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the 4 2 OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller If no operation is performed within 5 seconds the display will return to the previous display 8 00 Saco Settings gt Volume amp Beeps Ringtone C bOssesessocse DO Incoming Call C L vcccccvccces gt Outgoing Call Jecoeg eon 3 7 Switch Beeps Gudance Voice Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1254 Press and hold the amp 2 OFF button for more than two seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on IMAGE VIEWER if so equipped USING THE IMAGE VIEWER When a compatible portable storage device is plugged into the USB jack located in the center console compatible image files stored on the device can be viewed on the control panel de vice Connecting the portable storage device To connect a portable storage device to the sys tem so that images stored on it can be viewed insert the device into the USB jack located in the center console Settings gt Image Viewer 1 XXXXXXX jpg
7. When the SEEK CAT 4 button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK PI button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind Fast Forward buttons lt lt gt i Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or the TRACK Pl fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders CD select buttons To play another CD that has been loaded press a CD select button 1 6 RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD All Disc Repeat 1 Disc Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Disc Random 1 Disc Random All Disc Repeat 4 78 Monitor climate
8. Beep when a button is pushed LHA1305 Settings gt Camera Predictive Course Lines SON oe LO SCC onset When backing display car width approximation LHA1306 C Settings gt Clock 8 00 On screen Clock o ON KIEEDO Clock Format Daylight Savings Time o ON Time Zone Adjust Clock SCC rire dovom LILA Display clock in top right corner of display LHA1307 Switch beeps settings Select the Switch Beeps key to adjust the switch beeps settings With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed Camera settings Select the Camera key The Camera settings screen will appear When this option is on indicator light illumi nated predictive course lines will be displayed when the RearView monitor is displayed on the screen See RearView Monitor in this section for more information Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Clock Format Choose either the 12h 12 hour clock display or the 24h 24 hour clock display Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition s
9. Track time displays the amount of time the track has played e Album title displays the title of the CD being played e Song title displays the title of the selected CD track MP3 display mode To change the text displayed when listening to a CD with MP8s and ID3 tags press the DISP CLOCK button The DISP CLOCK button will scroll through the CD text as follows Disc number Track number and Folder number gt Folder title Song title Artist name Album title Disc number displays the number of the current disc playing Track number displays the number of the track playing on the selected disc Folder number displays the number of the current folder on the MP3 CD e Folder title displays the title of the folder e Song title displays the title of the song play ing Artist name displays the name of the artist of the song playing Album title displays the title of the album of the song playing FM AM radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the AM FM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the AM FM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is playing when the AM FM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radi
10. Volume of voice Slow Good Fast Speed Start of speaking Fam Sood Try Again Done LHA1328 Information gt User Guide 8 00 Tips on Speaking Commands Say commands when there are minimal background sounds Say voice commands clearly Avoid talking slow or with long pauses Say commands after the tone LHA1330 Let s Practice The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows you to practice saying commands and receive feedback on the volume speed and timing of your speech To initiate a practice session access the User Guide and select the Let s Practice key Follow the on screen prompts until the session is com plete After the session is completed a screen will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ ent elements of your speech Select the Try Again to repeat the session if improvement is needed Select the Done key to return to the User Guide screen Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor rectly 1 Select Help on Speaking 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller or touching the page down key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 155 8 00 Settings gt Voice Recognition User Guide Alternate Command Mode Gui
11. Fuel Economy Maintenance SON oc e LO WHA1149 HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button The display screen shows vehicle information for your convenience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Avg kkk Fuel Econ Conjo MPG Fuel Econ History SLIT b o LHA1301 Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller to display Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy History Distance to empty MI or km The Distance to Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The d
12. When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock e Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resulting ina fire or an electric shock ACAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA1196 HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the monitor Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body Red line approx 1 5 ft 0 5 m Yellow line approx 3 ft 1 m Green line approx 7 ft 2 m Green line approx 10 ft 3 m Vehicle width guide lines Indicate the vehicle width when backing up Predictive course lines Indicate the predictive course when backing up The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift selector is in the R Reverse position and the steering wheel is turned The predictive course lines will move de pending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steer ing wheel is in the neutral position The vehicle width guide lin
13. gt Play Il Pause LHA1458 Settings gt Bluetooth odi Yul 8 00 Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices Edit Bluetooth Info Replace Connected Phone Settings gt connect Devic i Fil 8 00 Handsfree Phone Audio Player LHA1316 LHA1296 Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis played on the screen Bluetooth audio settings To adjust the Bluetooth audio settings follow the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Connected Devices key 4 110 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 Select the Audio Player key Settings gt Audio Player Sod Yul 8 00 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX None None None LHA1297 Settings gt Audio Player o MDa 8 00 Device Name XXXXXXXX Select Device Address CO XXXXXXXX Delete LHA1298 LHA0049 5 A list of the connected Bluetooth audio 6 The Device Name and Device Address are players is displayed Select the name of the displayed on the screen
14. 00000 8s 8 10 Changing engine oil filter 0 8 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid 8 11 Power steering fluide ccscctectei ride end chee ae 8 12 Brake fluid ciini nrpu chee garda na dawn Oa 8 12 Windshield washer fluid 0 ccc eee 8 13 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 8 13 Batley endise ooperite leaned saeee A kee Da 8 14 Jump Starting soccer erica a ssrin eraai latte 8 15 Variable voltage control system if so equipped 8 16 Drive HDS Ea tics cohen cheat onen pee delta a cane E 8 16 Spark sPlUGs aise Gmads nica gd a deadinnnegend be 8 17 Replacing spark plugs ec see eee 8 17 Air Cleanehisiyiccaveravarcatitaerekeeweasuerages e 8 18 In Cabin MICKORISE esir ce esse wie na eae eat ia eee 8 18 Windshield wiper blades 00 0000 cece eae 8 19 Cle ANIAG erni whales adelee anata a aemede oem 8 19 Replacing i isccaieitacee asedad ate Vaan ia 8 19 Brakes cuier perreo eek wren need salam iae oes 8 20 FUSES eseciienibandensimbonds sake tied o EE san 8 21 Engine compartment 2 0 0 6 0600c cess eee eee 8 22 Passenger compartment 0cc eee eee 8 23 Battery replacement 0 00 c cece eee ee 8 25 NISSAN Intelligent Key 0000 8 25 Lights faccccectienereih mode ie tides ween eee e 8 26 He adlighiSsii c2sc ee0r8 tices veeeve bee ets 8 26 Fog lights if so equipped eee e eee 8 27 Exterior and interior
15. 008 4 47 VieW MAlUNCHON neei cette ect eatin shade ita 4 48 Operating tipsne resres sariso revisi eee eee eee 4 48 VONIS i caivrcw eaters Laird wade athanr d eetitdent 4 49 Heater and air conditioner automatic Type A 4 50 Automatic operation se cerrcsses ie eee eee 4 50 Manual operation 00 ornoak 4 51 Rear seat air conditioner e eee 4 52 Operating tips co cc oe cenge niany aieia 4 53 Heater and air conditioner automatic Type B 4 54 Automatic operation 00 0cce cece eens 4 55 Manual operatiOn ss cer resser rediro esos takes 4 55 Operating TPS scccic ets ee Ge iranieni ed when ee as 4 58 Servicing air conditioner a suss 00 e cee eee eee 4 58 AUGIOSYSIOM 2 2 ide dasa renis teneis spacers is 4 59 FRAO stor eoth ccd estate dedi etic elantctastnets adi aya aranne rend 4 59 FM radio reception si ecc cces sea eeeeee ded eee 4 59 AM radio reception 0 00 0 cece neces 4 59 Satellite radio reception if so equipped 4 60 Audio operation precautions 000 4 60 FM AM radio with compact disc CD changer if so equipped eee eee 4 75 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped 0 cece eee eee ee 4 80 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player if so equipped 0 eect eee eee 4 87 Digital Versatile Disc DVD Player Operation models with Navigation System 4 95 USB interface models witho
16. 10 LRS2187 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 10 Supplemental front impact air bag mod ules Air bag Control Unit ACU Occupant classification sensor weight sensor Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators Satellite sensors Seat belt with pretensioner Pressure sensors in door driver s side shown passenger side similar Crash zone sensor NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats AWARNING To ensure proper operation of the passen ger s advanced air bag system please ob serve the following items e Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket Do not place heavy loads heavier than 2 2 Ib 1 kg on the seatback head re straint or in the seatback pocket Do not store luggage behind the seat that can press into the seatback Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat If the front seat does contact the rear seat the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash If a forward facing child restraint is in stalled in the front passenger seat do not position the front passenger seat so the child re
17. 2 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows use the fan speed control dial to set the fan speed to maximum e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode When the OY front defroster button is pressed the air conditioner will automati cally be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C The air recirculate mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compart ment to further improve the defogging per formance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Turnthe fan speed control dial to manually control the fan speed Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Press the C amp air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle The TS indicator light on the button will come on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the Y front defrosting mode or the front defrosting and foot out let mode Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode the intake air will be con trolled automatically To manually control the in take air press the gt air recirculation button To return to the automatic control mode press and hold the gt air recirculation button fo
18. Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction to the desired tilt position A CAUTION For vehicles with automatic drive posi tioner Failure to reset the tilt and tele scoping functions of the steering wheel after the vehicle s battery has been dis charged may prevent the steering wheel position from being adjusted For vehicles with automatic drive positioner Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle s battery has been dis charged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic operation from locking in one position When the battery has been recharged or replaced perform the following For telescopic operation Adjust the switch so the steering wheel moves to the most forward and backward position that can be reached e For tilt operation Adjust the switch so the steering wheel moves to the highest position that can be reached Performing these operations resets the range of the steering wheel s tilt and telescopic function Entry Exit function The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver s door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily The steering wheel moves back into position when the driver s door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed For more information see Automatic drive posi tioner in th
19. For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the In case of emergency section and Tire Pressure in the Maintenance and do it yourself section AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the tire and loading informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warnin
20. SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this five second pe riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Six stations can be set for the AM band Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 Eighteen stations can be set for the XM band 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XM3 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button or choose the satellite band SAT1 or SAT2 using the AUX button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as
21. Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Press the ENTER button to show the iPod Menu CD Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number if playing compressed audio files Press the ENTER button to show the CD Menu DVD if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the title number e Press the ENTER button to select an item from the DVD display When the transparent operation menu ap pears the switch will control the menu USB if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number e Press the ENTER button to show the USB Menu Bluetooth Audio if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number AUX Press the ENTER button to show the AUX Menu BACK switch Press the switch to return to the previous screen or cancel the current selection Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 113 Zo WHA0790 ANTENNA The antenna cannot be shortened but can be removed When you need to remov
22. 4 4 127 4 141 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 32 Headlight control switch 2 32 Headlights 3 2 dg eta tact Sven ae aed 8 26 Heated seats 2 37 2 38 2 41 Heated steering wheel 2 39 Heater Heater and air conditioner COMMONS ys ase e naa ik alae hemes 4 50 4 55 Heater operation 4 51 4 55 Rear seat air conditioner 4 52 Hill start assist system 2 2 ee 5 31 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 59 2 63 Hood releases ic 6 a 4 cack tae ee a ad 3 22 Hook Luggage hook 05 2 49 OM 6 A Re ad BG da doe a l 2 37 l Ignition Switch Push Button Ignition Switch 5 10 Image vieW r se caca a we 4 31 Immobilizer system 2 28 3 4 5 13 Important vehicle information label 9 10 In cabin microfilter 2 0 0 samean 8 18 Increasing fuel economy 5 22 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 0 2 eee ee ee 2 10 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 32 INSIDE MIRO ee a a are ew Bye wee 4 3 32 Instrument brightness control 2 35 Instrument panel 000 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 35 Intelligent Key system Key operating range 3 9 Key operation s s resesi ga miia u 3 10 Mechanical key oaaae 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation
23. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control AWARNING e While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident e If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the
24. Instrument panel 06 2 ceeeessssae sendea denne cee aaes 2 2 Meters and gaugeS 0 0 cece e eee eee 2 3 Speedometer and odometer 00 e0eee 2 4 Tachometer ici c case ersttiven yuade diana 2 4 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 FUG GAUGE tsue eiticchss ni jubie e a tee 2 5 Compass display if so equipped 0 0s eee 2 6 Compass display 0 00sec e eee eee 2 7 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 10 Checking bulbs e iscsc eeesckiee ea ddnaeaw itits 2 10 Warning light inc siacecsiecued aides wasted onan 2 10 indicator lights sic cs eee ese tena desea ene 2 15 Audible reminders 000 ccc nee eens 2 17 Vehicle Information Display 00 00s 2 18 How to use the vehicle information display 2 18 Staitup display vic indSesecdsien ieee amine eee 2 18 SCUINGS sci cei geese drrergvdenidds aeeagengewn 2 19 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators entana cox Giant abit ao a EOE teaget 2 24 Security SYSTEMS esiin oi i in 2 27 Vehicle security system 0 000 c cece eee 2 27 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 28 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 29 Switch operation sc coveis ede arsi ureniiiueimts 2 29 Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 30 Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster SWITCH oa iie scat dopraptit taiete heated Soda ti 2 31 Headlight and turn signal swi
25. Phonebook Recent Calls Connect Phone When you press and release the buttonon the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking After the main menu you can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response Call Main Menu Call Speak name Phone Number Speak Digits Special Number Redial Call Back Speak name If you have stored entries in the phonebook you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phonebook in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you
26. The intermittent tone will stop after three seconds when an object is detected by only the corner sonar and the distance does not change The tone will stop when the object gets away from the vehicle In the below cases the sonar will be turned back on automatically When the shift selector is in the R Reverse position When the CAMERA button is pressed and a screen other than the camera view is shown on the display When vehicle speed decreases below ap proximately 6 mph 10 km h When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and turned back to the ON position again HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW To adjust the Display ON OFF Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the Around View Monitor press the SETTING button with the Around View Monitor on select the item key and adjust the level using the NISSAN controller Do not adjust the Brightness Tint Color Con trast and Black Level of the Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving Make sure the park ing brake is firmly applied Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 LHA2550 VIEW MALFUNCTION When the icon is displayed on the screen the Around View Monitor may not be calibrated cor rectly This will not hinder normal driving function but the system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer OPERATING TIPS ACAUTION e Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to cl
27. The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook After the system rec ognizes the command speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry List Names Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Phonebook phones with automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving 4 136 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Main Menu Phonebook Say a Name List Names Record Name For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth profile
28. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off road use As with other vehicles with features of this type fail ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On pavement and off road driving precautions and Avoid ing collision and rollover and Driving safety precautions in the Starting and driving section of this manual MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduc
29. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system When the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is oper ating the request switch to lock the door Put the Intelligent Key in a purse pocket or your other hand 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments ACAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials LPD2105 Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 3 The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once 4 Push the door handle request switch again within 1 minute to unlock all doors For power liftgate opening 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Press the power liftgate request switch am LPD2106 NOTE Request switches for all doors and liftgate can be deactivated
30. aa 9 10 Cold weather driving 5 32 Compact disc CD player 4 83 4 91 Console box 2 s rs 24k a eee nid baad 2 48 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 14 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid oe a ee ee eee 8 11 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 04 5 14 Control panel buttons 4 16 Brightness contrast button 4 15 4 30 Enter button 2004 4 4 4 16 Setting button 4 9 4 23 Without navigation system 4 4 Controls Audio controls steering wheel 4 112 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 50 4 55 Rear seat air conditioner 4 52 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 2 2 2 ee 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Corrosion protection de a aegri ani a 7 6 Cruise control aaa 5 19 C p holders ssy e ene ch he ae Bere weed 2 46 10 2 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 34 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIC ap is ee Reda Sar aa 2 31 Digital Versatile Disc DVD player 4 95 Dimensions and weights 9 8 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 35 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 4 4 16 Distance toempty 4 7 4 20 DOOM OCKS si sai ek a ek es Ge a 3 5 Drive belt lt pra m
31. e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible e Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL LDI2087 WDI0214 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL i Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 LDI2145 CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1 Park the vehicle on a level su
32. functions are off and the ft indicator will not flash The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction AWARNING e The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer ing operation at high speeds or by care less or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully Starting and driving 5 29 e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling per formance and the R indicator may flash or both the f and indi cator lights may illuminate If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly and both the
33. in this section for add ing editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle phonebook Delete Phonebook Delete a phonebook stored on the system 4 150 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Download Handset Phonebook See Handset Phonebook in this section for adding editing and deleting contacts in the handset phonebook Settings gt Volume amp Ringto 9o dH Fal 8 00 lerccccccceed DO Ringtone Incoming Call Outgoing Call lt CELEI ON Automatic Hold Vehicle Ringtone ON l 175 LHA1325 Settings gt Bluetooth o MYu 8 00 Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices Edit Bluetooth Info Replace Connected Phone LHA1316 Volume amp Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone incoming call sound and outgoing call sound When the Automatic Hold option is turned on an incom ing call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings When the Vehicle Ringtone op tion is turned on a specific ringtone that is differ ent from the cellular phone s will sound when receiving a call Auto Downloaded See Handset Phonebook in this section for information about automatically downloading the handset phonebook BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred setti
34. 1 3 User Name can be edited LHA1349 5 Select a category to be learned by the sys tem from the following list Phone Navigation Information Audio Help The voice commands in the category are displayed 6 Select a voice command to train The Voice Recognition system starts 7 The system requests that you repeat a com mand after a tone This command is also displayed on the screen 8 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to Ly speak the command that the system requested 9 When the system has recognized the voice command the voice of the user is learned Press the button or the BACK button to return to the previous screen If the system has learned the command correctly the voice command indicator on the screen turns on Speaker Adaptation function settings Edit Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen Reset Result Resets the user s voice that the Voice Recogni tion system has learned Continuous Learning When this item is turned to ON you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession without selecting commands one by one Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 173 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the a
35. 13 Fog light switch if so equipped P 2 36 14 Replacing bulbs P 8 26 15 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 32 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details P io gt a 15 14 13 LII2048 Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR 98 7 LII2045 0 4 Illustrated table of contents 1 Moonroof if so equipped panoramic sunshade if so equipped P 2 53 2 55 2 Antenna P 4 114 3 Rear window wiper and washer switch P 2 30 4 Liftgate release power P 3 22 manual P 3 22 5 Rearview monitor if so equipped P 4 34 6 Replacing bulbs P 8 26 7 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 27 P 9 3 8 Fuel filler door P 3 27 9 Child safety rear door lock P 3 7 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LI12047 Glove box Console box P 2 48 Map lights P 2 58 Storage P 2 44 Moonroof if so equipped Panoramic sunshade if so equipped P 2 53 2 55 Luggage hooks P 2 50 Cup holders P 2 46 Seats P 1 2 1 6 1 8 Sun visors P 3 31 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details AOND gt OND Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 11 1 LIC2383 0 6 Vent P 4 49 Headlight fog light if so equippe
36. 2WD mode The AUTO mode may change to the LOCK mode before the warning light blinks This is normal If the warning light blinks rapidly during operation stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a safe place immediately Then if the light goes off after a while you can continue driving A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly about once per 2 seconds Pull off the road in a safe area and idle the engine Check that all tire sizes are the same tire pressure is correct and tires are not worn Change the 4WD mode switch to the 2WD mode and do not drive fast A CAUTION If the warning light illuminates while driving 4WD mode will be changed to 2WD mode Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Be especially careful when driving Never drive on dry hard surface roads in the LOCK mode as this will overload the power train and may cause a seri ous malfunction e The power train may be damaged if you continue driving with the 4WD warning light blinking rapidly AWD mode indicator lights The 4WD mode indicator lights F are located in the instrument panel The 4WD mode indicator lights F illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The indicator lights turn off within 1 second The 4WD mode indicator lights will display the mode selected by the 4WD mode switch wh
37. 3 13 Troubleshooting guide 3 18 WarningisignalS sis ss o 22 0 2444 3 18 Interiof light s sosa rosen a 2 57 iPod Player 0 4 103 4 105 ISOFIX child restraints 1 32 J JUMP StaMiNG i e a0 ac da Pde e oda ad 6 9 K Keyfob battery replacement 8 25 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system 3 13 Keys For Intelligent Key system 3 2 3 7 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 11 C M V S S certification label 2 2 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Engine serialnumber 9 10 F M V S S certification label 2 9 10 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Warning labels for SRS 1 64 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Systemi i sw aca eee ee Rae aed 1 32 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 Lift gatesi erse ib Se eh ee Be ba es 3 22 Lift gaterelease 2 ee eee 3 26 Light Air bag warning light 2 1 64 2 14 Brake light See stop light 8 27 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement 8 27 Charge warning light 2 11 Fog light switch 00 2 36 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 32 Headlight control switch 2 32 Headlights 0 00 8 26 Interior light e e saose i ary pean 2 57 Light Bu
38. 5 2 65 Clearing the programmed information 2 66 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 66 If your vehicle is stolen 0000 ee eee eee 2 66 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 11 1 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 LIC2383 1 Vent P 4 49 4 Instrument brightness control P 2 35 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn 5 Driver supplemental air bag Horn signal switch P 2 32 P 1 49 P 2 37 3 Control panel and Vehicle Information 6 Meters gauges warning indicator Display switches P 2 18 2 2 Instruments and controls lights and Vehicle Information Display P 2 3 2 10 2 18 10 tt 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Twin trip odometer reset switch P 2 4 Windshield wiper washer switch and rear window wiper washer switch P 2 29 P 2 30 Center display P 4 16 4 4 Navigation system switches if so equipped Audio system controls P 4 59 Center display P 4 16 4 4 Navigation system if so equipped Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 49 Glove box P 2 48 Audio system controls P 4 59 Automatic heater and air conditioning controls P 4 50 4 54 Hazard light switch P 6 2 Ignition switch P 5 10 Cruise control main set switches P 5 19 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 29 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System P 4 127 4 141 Hood release P 3 22 20 Vehicle dynamic control VDC OFF switch P 2 41
39. Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward backward or sideways you could be injured Whenever you drive off road through sand mud or water as deep as the wheel hub more frequent maintenance may be required See Periodic mainte nance in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Starting and driving 5 9 PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Do not operate the push button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu tive times in quick succession or the igni tion switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven this could lead to a crash and serious injury 5 10 Starting and driving LSD2014 When the ignition switch is pushed without de pressing the brake pedal the ignition switch will illuminate Push the ignition switch center once to change to ACC two times to change to ON three times to return to OFF The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the shift selector is moved to the P Park posi tion When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to ward the OFF position proceed as
40. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them In addition to factory installed options your ve hicle may also be equipped with additional ac cessories installed by NISSAN or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures warnings cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and or accessory See a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular ac cessories w
41. List of voice commands in this section lt gt Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE END button to select a different lan guage button for more 3 Press the button For information on voice adaptation see Voice Adaptation VA mode in this sec tion 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French To select the current language press the PHONE SEND __ button To select a different language tilt the tuning switch or M up or down 4 132 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE You must press the button within 5 seconds to change the language 5 If you decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Connecting procedure NOTE The connecting procedure must be per formed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Connect phone Add phone
42. The remote engine start operating range is ap proximately 197 ft 60 m from the vehicle REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE To use the remote start feature to start the engine perform the following 1 Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle 2 Press the LOCK button to lock all doors 3 Within 5 seconds press and hold the Q remote start button until the turn signal lights illuminate If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the Q remote start but ton for about 2 seconds The following events will occur when the engine starts The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on The engine will continue to run for 10 min utes Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes See Extending engine run time in this section Depress the brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position before driving For further instructions see Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME The remote start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in Remote starting the vehicle in this section Run time will be calculated as follows The first 10 minute run time will start when the remote start function is performed The second 10 minutes will start immedi ately when the remote start function is per formed For exa
43. Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo Never allow anyone to ride in the lug gage area It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seri ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Instruments and controls 2 49 LIC2244 LIC2386 CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN To access the floor storage area push down 4 to raise the handle then pull up on the handle to lift the luggage board 2 50 Instruments and controls ROOF RACK if so equipped Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are avail able through your NISSAN dealer Contact an NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment information Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross bars Do not load more than 150 Ib 68 kg on the cross bars Observe the maximum load limit shown on the cross bars or roof carriers when you attach them on the roof cross bars Contact an NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equip ment information Do not apply any load directly to
44. When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Lockout protection When the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position and any door is open all doors will lock and unlock automatically With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door is open all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h All doors unlock automatically when the ig nition is placed in the OFF position The automatic unlock function can be de activated or activated To deactivate or acti vate the automatic door unlock system perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 push and hold the power door lock switch to the position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds 4 When activated the hazard indicator will flash twice When deactivated the hazard indicator will flash once 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change When the automatic door unlock system is deac
45. eee nireki irens 3 23 Operating the power liftgate if so equipped 3 24 Power liftgate main switch 00s eee 3 26 Liftgate TeleaSe ieee ats pectin eaea aaae 3 26 Liftgate position setting eee eee 3 27 Fuel tiller door isceces saueed oncaiws sarees cheered 3 27 Opening the fuel filler door 0 3 27 FUCIINGR CAD a eero o indi tnetiotia 3 28 Tilt telescopic steering 0 eee eee eee 3 29 Manual operation if so equipped 3 30 Automatic operation if so equipped 3 30 SUN VISOS opor ereen cis Pasi T EO EEE ene 3 31 Vanity MONS cesi ceneedeianien thas Ers EEVEE 3 32 MINOS 2 rtsr eru ets Ders ENA EAE r OEE EAEN 3 32 Rearview mirror if so equipped 000 3 32 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped 6 eee eee eee 3 32 Outside MINOS era e e cdameas diated 3 34 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 35 Memory storage function 00 e eee 3 35 Entry exit TUNCtON csere rpnsee riders enuiari tiss 3 37 System Op r ti M su oyiviectkawvewwortonwendetes 3 38 Setting memory function 0005 3 38 KEYS LPD0350 Type A 1 Intelligent Key 2 sets 2 Mechanical key 3 Key number plate 1 plate 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments Type B WPD0427 1 bled j c LPD2052 Type C NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY You
46. gt San S Ira NANN AN Ig TA s gi DU lt 7 12 Radiator cap 13 Windshield washer fluid reservoir NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity VQ35DE engine 1 2 3 4 5 8 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Drive belt location Fuse box Engine oil filler cap 6 Maintenance and do it yourself 6 Brake fluid reservoir 7 Air cleaner 8 Fuse box 9 Fuse box Fusible links 10 Battery 11 Engine oil dipstick ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre diluted mixture of 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue and 50 water to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The antifreeze solution con tains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional en gine cooling system additives are not necessary AWARNING e Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap ACAUTION e Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine tr
47. in this section for more information Image viewer settings For information about these settings refer to Image viewer in this section Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System in this section Phone settings For phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section Bluetooth settings For Bluetooth phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section For Bluetooth audio settings refer to Bluetooth streaming audio in this section Volume amp beeps settings Navigation volume For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual for infor mation regarding these settings Phone volume For phone volume settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation Sys tem in this section 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 8 00 Gack Settings gt Volume amp Beeps Audio Volume b sssesessese DO Guidance Volume C lOssoccocossej gt Ringtone G P cccccccccce gt Incoming Call G bOcesccccccoef gt Outgoing Call Gliese DO going 1 7 Use volume knob to adjust during playback
48. later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet s
49. onds until the frequency signal has been learned The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indi cates successful training Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 3 to complete If the device was unplugged during the pro gramming procedure remember to plug it back in when programming is completed OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver after it is programmed can be used to activate the pro grammed device To operate simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The amber indicator light will illuminate while the sig nal is being transmitted For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries Instruments and controls 2 65 position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1
50. s ears a high back booster seat should be used f the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat Booster seat installation A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraint and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 rs WRS0699 1 48 1 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions LRS0454 Front passenger position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the veh
51. 0 cee eee eee AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 49 2 Occupant classification sensor weight sensor 3 Seat belts P 1 21 4 Head Restraints P 1 9 5 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag P 1 49 6 Folding 3rd row bench P 1 8 7 3rd row bench seat top tether strap anchor located on bottom of seatback P 1 45 8 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor located on bottom of seatback P 1 44 9 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren P 1 32 10 Folding 2nd row bench P 1 6 11 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 49 12 Seat belt with pretensioners P 1 63 13 Seats 1st row P 1 2 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details LI12049 0 2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT 1 Front view camera if so equipped P 4 39 2 Engine hood P 3 22 3 Windshield wiper and washer switch wiper blades P 2 29 8 19 4 _Windshield washer fluid P 8 19 5 Compass display if so equipped P 2 6 6 Power windows P 2 51 7 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key Remote Engine Start if so equipped keys P 3 5 3 2 3 20 3 2 8 Mirrors P 3 32 9 Side view camera if so equipped P 4 39 10 Tire pressure monitoring system if so equipped P 8 30 11 Flat tire P 6 3 12 Tire chains P 8 37
52. 0000 O 0 rSoS S7 O LSD2127 Shifting Press the button while depressing the ad brake pedal D Press the button A to shift D Shift without pressing button After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal push the press the shift selector button and move the shift selector from the P Park position to any of the desired shift positions Starting and driving 5 15 AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage A CAUTION Use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift selector button pushed in to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position 5 16 Starting and driving R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse p
53. 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons Individual buttons cannot be cleared However individual buttons can be reprogrammed see Reprogramming a single HomeLink button in this section 2 66 Instruments and controls To clear all programming 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons HomeLink is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink Step 1 REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton DO NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button proceed with Pro gramming HomeLink Step 1 Fo
54. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label LT12029 Cargo area luggage hooks SECURING THE LOAD There are luggage hooks located in the cargo area as shown The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps Do not apply a total load of more than 6 5 Ibs 29 N to a single metal floor hook when securing cargo 9 16 Technical and consumer information AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seri ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you d
55. O light illuminates Pull the lever back to select the low beam Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the Dd or 2 position the headlights will turn off after a period of time After the headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the P gt 4 or 2 position the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then turned to the P gt 4 or 2 position ACAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The daytime running lights automatically illumi nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights oper ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or inthe DAE position Turn the headlight switch to the 2 position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF posit
56. Occupants RR 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib Trailer Tongue Weight 300 Ib 27 kg 135 kg Luggage oo 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 472 kg Occupants Luggage Load limit Remaining available 640 kg load capacity 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 Ib 500 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 14kg 70 kg 227 kg LTI0152 Example Steps for determining correct load limit 1 4 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1 400 750 5 X 150 650 lbs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg Technical and consumer information 9 15 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6
57. Phone gt vehicle Phonebook dl Ful 8 00 Add New LHA1320 S ettings gt Edit vehicle Pho Bo Mui 8 00 Copy from Call History Copy from the Handset Enter Number by Keypad LHA1321 Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o ME Yul Back U Entry Name Number XXX XXXX Type H Voicetag LHA1381 VEHICLE PHONEBOOK This vehicle has two phonebooks available for your use Depending on your phone the system may automatically download your entire cell phone s phonebook into the Handset Phone book For the details on downloading your phonebook see Handset phonebook in this section If your phonebook does not automati cally download you may set up the vehicle phonebook for up to 40 entries This phonebook allows you to record a name to speak while using voice recognition 1 Press the f wheel button on the steering 2 Select the Vehicle Phonebook key Select the Add New key at the top of the screen Choose the method for entering the phone book entry For this example select Enter Number by Keypad Enter the digits and select the OK key For more information see How to use the touchscreen in this section Select the Voicetag key to record a
58. Tow mode switch P 2 42 Liftgate release switch if so equipped P 3 22 Heated steering wheel switch if so equipped P 2 39 Power inverter switch if so equipped P 2 41 Power liftgate main switch if so equipped P 3 26 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details METERS AND GAUGES 2 4 a LIC2254 oaRWON Tachometer Warning indicator lights Vehicle Information Display Speedometer Fuel gauge Odometer Twin trip odometer ve Engine coolant temperature gauge Instruments and controls 2 3 LIC2255 LIC2234 LIC2219 SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer 4 and the twin trip odometer are displayed below the Vehicle Information Dis play when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips 2 4 Instruments and controls Changing the display Pushing the TRIP RESET switch on the right of the instrument panel to change the display as follows Tip A Trip B_ Trip A Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer
59. Universal Transceiver Instruments and controls SIC3612 SIC3613 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks slowly after 20 seconds Release both buttons 2 Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter button DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed 4 Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps
60. Vehicle infor mation display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the M button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations e Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section Opening windows The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic opera tion To open the windows press the but ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key WPD0414 Releasing the rear liftgate if so equipped The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by performing the following e Press the T button for lon
61. Volume amp Beeps You can also adjust the volume of an incoming voice during a call by pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob on the instrument panel 4 152 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM if so equipped NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this ve hicle such as phone and vehicle information There are two voice recognition modes of opera tion available They are Standard Mode Alternate Command Mode In Standard Mode the factory default setting commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system Not all NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available while in Standard Mode For advanced operation you can change to an Alternate Command Mode that enables the op eration of the display and audio system through NISSAN Voice Recognition When this mode is active an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pressing the amp button on the steering wheel and the voice command menu prompts are turned off In Alternate Command Mode the recognition success rate may be affected because the num ber of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased See NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com mand
62. When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual Tow mode Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF Tow mode includes the following features Grade logic Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade 9 28 Technical and consumer information Downhill Speed Control DSC automati cally downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage However fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmissio
63. When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0896 Shoulder belt height adjustment front and 2nd row outboard seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage To adjust push the button and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so that the belt passes over the center of the shoul der The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off of your shoulder Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident LRS2157 3rd row s
64. benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolor ation To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use wax on the camera window Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water AROUND VIEW MONITOR if so equipped With the ignition switch in the ON position press the CAMERA button or move the shift selector to the R Reverse position to operate the Around View Monitor The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format Available views Bird Eye View The surrounding view of the vehicle from above Front Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger s side wheel Rearview An approximately 150 degree view of the rear of the vehicle The system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 LHA2471 There are some areas where the system will not show objects When in the front or rearview display an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed When in the bird eye view a tall object near the seam of the camera viewing areas will not appear in the moni tor A WARNING e The Around View Monitor is a
65. blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury e The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire e Do not rapidly apply the brakes e Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal e Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the
66. e Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry e Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer xy SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver s door and glove box Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 A CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot See Doors in this section and Storage in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Valet hand off When you have to leave a key w
67. erly secured with the tire stem facing up towards the bottom of the vehicle there is an increased risk of separating from the vehicle in the event of crash which may pose a hazard in traffic or risk of injury to others JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed AWARNING e If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle e Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres ent in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water e Keep battery out of the reach of children e The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle In case of emergency 6 9 Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting e Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury e Your vehicle has an
68. gt Temperature control buttons passen ger s side DUAL passenger s side temperature control ON OFF button Gs rear window defroster button 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems S 3 fan speed control dial ON OFF button W7 front defroster button Temperature control dial driver s side AUTO automatic climate control ON button AWARNING e The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and or dehumidified heating AUTO This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Press the AUTO button on The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed 2 Turn the temper
69. i ite key Select the List key on the movie file operation Audio e gt Play screen to display the file list Select the gt key to start playing the movie file or resume the movie file if it has LHA1380 been paused Settings EE Stop Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings Select the W key to stop playing the e Audio File Playback movie file Switch to the audio playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB ppl Next Chapter Fast Forward memory contains audio files Select the PPI key to skip the chapter s Sd sis he N P or 1 Track of the disc forward The chapters will ad pose between fie Normal or sae vance the number of times the key is se Repeat play modes lected Press and hold the key to fast for ward the chapter 4 102 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 10 Key Search Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and the specified file or folder will be played Display Adjust the image quality of the screen DRC DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers Audio Choose the preferred language of the audio Subtitle Choose the preferred language of the sub titles Display Mode Choose between the Normal Wide Ci
70. iPod and iPod cable the console lid may not fully close Do not force con sole lid closed as this may damage the iPod and iPod cable e Do not force the iPod cable into the USB port Inserting the iPod cable tilted or up side down into the port may damage the iPod cable and the port Make sure that the iPod cable is con nected correctly into the USB port Some iPod cables come witha mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be fore inserting the iPod cable e Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to prevent the objects from lean ing on the iPod cable and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the iPod cable and the port To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle re move the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove
71. later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind e Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 LRS2137 LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that
72. the Phonebook command is used to manage en tries in the vehicle phonebook You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone connected to the system When a phone is connected to the system the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call contacts by name You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing For more information see Record name in this section NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B List Names Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session See the Record name command in this section for infor mation about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pronounc ing Record Name The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficult
73. the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Compact disc CD changer operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the LOAD button then press one of the CD insert 1 6 slots Insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided auto matically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while a compact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc LOAD button To insert a CD in the CD changer press the LOAD button for less than 1 5 seconds Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select button 1 6 then insert the CD Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer press the LOAD button for more than 1 5 seconds The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer DISC button When the DISC button is pressed with the sys tem off and a compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play lt lt Ppl SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons
74. unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door or the trunk liftgate with the key pressing the button on the Intelligent Key or press ing the request switch on the driver s or passen ger s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key Never leave these keys in the vehicle 2 28 Instruments and controls FCC Notice For USA This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device LICO474 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenev
75. 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 107 When the M4 SEEK CAT button or TRACK button is pressed for more than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when the iPod is playing iPod gt Artists 8 00 LHA1399 Scrolling menus While navigating long lists of artists albums or songs in the music menu it is possible to scrol the list by the first letter To activate letter index ing perform one of the following Turn the NISSAN controller quickly Press and hold the up down directional ar rows on the NISSAN controller Touch and hold the page up down arrows on the touchscreen 4 108 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To exit the scrolling by letter mode perform one of the following Press the ENTER button on the NISSAN controller Push the ENTER switch on the steering wheel Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO if so equipped If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio de vice that is capable of playing audio files the device can be connected t
76. 2 XXXXXXX jpg 3 XXXXXXX jpg 4 XXXXXXX jpg 8 00 Full Screen Display LHA1309 Viewing images To view an image press the SETTING button and then select the Image Viewer key with the NISSAN controller The Image Viewer screen will be displayed A list of compatible images on the storage device is displayed on the left side of the screen while the selected image is displayed on the right side of the screen To choose a different picture from the list use the NISSAN controller to scroll through the list once the desired image is high lighted Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 Select the Full Screen Display key and press the ENTER button to view a full screen version of the image Image requirements Image type JPEG File extensions jpg jpeg Maximum resolution 2048 x 1536 Maximum size 2 MB Colors 32 768 15 bit Maximum file name length 253 bytes dis play only shows first 8 characters Maximum folders 500 Maximum images per folder 1024 8 00 Settings LHA1310 Viewing images in a slideshow To view all of the images on the device in a slideshow first enter the full screen mode while viewing one of the images The slideshow control buttons are located on the right side of the screen 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Select the
77. 9 4 Dial 47 Change Number 011811112223333 Manual Controls Please continue or say Dial To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1340 5 Say 011811112223333 6 Say Dial 7 The system makes a call to 011 81 111 222 3333 NOTE Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process as well as the special characters such as star pound and plus 4 164 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE The Alternate Command Mode enables control of the audio and display systems as well as additional commands for the Vehicle Information Phone and Navigation systems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the available commands at each step When Alternate Command Mode is activated an expanded list of commands can be used after pressing the amp button Under this mode the screen for Standard Mode commands is not available on the display Please review the ex panded command list available when this mode is active as some Standard Mode commands are replaced Please see examples of Alternate Command Mode screens Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased You can turn this mode ON or OFF When this mode is activate
78. AWD if so equipped The 4WD can be enabled disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position From the Main Menu Selection select 4WD to display the 4WD information when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Body Color The color of the vehicle that displays in the ve hicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position can be changed Instruments and controls 2 19 So all q Maintenance Oil and Filter Maintenance 2 gt Tire Maintenance de Other LIC2370 1 scheduled service oil and oil filter 2 tires 3 other Maintenance The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals To change an item 1 Press the button 2 Use the button until Settings is se lected and press ENTER 3 Select Maintenance using the but tons and press ENTER 2 20 Instruments and controls Service This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil and filter You can set or reset the distance for check ing or replacing these items For scheduled main tenance items and intervals see your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing tires You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires AWARNING T
79. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once programmed may now be used to activate the garage door etc To operate simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption Instruments and controls 2 61 position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm a
80. Heating A C OFF The air conditioner does not activate When you need to heat only use this mode 1 Press the A C button A C OFF will be displayed and A C indicator will turn off Operate the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Otherwise the sys tem may not work properly Not recommended if windows fog up Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Press the eV front defroster button on The indicator light on the button will come on Operate the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows use the fan speed control dial to set the fan speed to maximum As soon as possible after the windshield is clean press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode When the wy front defroster button is pressed the air conditioner will automati cally be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C The air recirculate mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compart ment to further improve the defogging per formance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Turnthe fan speed control dial to manually control the fan speed Press the AUTO but
81. INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FOC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions This device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Clarion VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section Settings 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Display Bluetooth Others LHA1236 LHA1236 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display Monitor climate audio phone an
82. If a child safety seat is installed on the passenger s side of the 2nd row seat the 3rd row can be accessed without removing the child safety seat Multi mode To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle lift up on the seatback lever located on the upper outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat This will release the back of the seat and fold up the seat cushion This will also re lease the seat tracks so you will be able to slide the seat forward or backward Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position push the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and tracks are locked Push the seat cushion down A CAUTION When returning the seat to its original position confirm that the seat and seat back are locked properly e Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk in seat e Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped up e Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat to pinch hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat Make sure the seat path is clear of all objects before moving the seat Child seat access mode AWARNING Do not leave a child in the child safety seat when operating the Child seat access mode The passenger s side of the 2nd row seat can be slid forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat without a child safety seat being removed To
83. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Master warning light When the ignition is in the ON position the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display No key warning Low fuel warning Low windshield washer fluid warning Parking brake release warning Door liftgate open warning Loose fuel cap Check tire pressure warning PS Power steering warning light AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running there will be no power assist for the steering You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be much harder to operate Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer When the ignition switch is in the ON position the power steering warning light illuminates After starting the engine the power steering warning light turns off This indicates that the electric power steering system is operational If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the hydraulic pump electri
84. Initiate from handset Name phone 1 Press the button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Connect phone The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 3 Say Add phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Own er s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed 4 The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call Phone Number Speak the digits Dial 1 Press the button on the steering wheel A tone will sound 2 Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 3 Say Phone Number
85. LHA1323 RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring the display will change to phone mode To receive a call follow one of the procedures listed below a Select the Answer key on the display b Press the phone button on the steering wheel switches There are some options available when receiving a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen Answer Accept an incoming call to talk Hold Call Put an incoming call on hold Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call follow one of the procedures listed below a Select the Reject Call key on the display b Press and hold the phone buttonon the steering wheel switches Got Yu 8 00 Call in Progress amp 0 04 Hang up Use Handset f XXXXXXXX Mute XXXXXXXX Keypad Switch Call 1 5 LHA2074 DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary Hang up Finish the call Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone Mute Mute your voice to the person Keypad Brings up a keypad enter digits when needed For example entering your PIN number for voice mail NOTE Pressthe button during a call to send numbers and digits using Voice Recogni tion Cancel Mute This will appear after the Mute key is selected Mute will
86. Select the Select device you wish to edit key to make this device the active CD CARE AND CLEANING e Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the Bluetooth audio player Select the Edit key to edit the details of the player such as Device Name Select the Delete key to delete the device disc Never touch the surface of the disc Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 111 A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated pu len x SOURCE r 4 kaS y LHA2448 1 Menu control switch ENTER button 2 5 BACK switch 3 Volume control switch 4 Power on and SOURCE select switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel POWER on switch With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio system on 1 3 4 112 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SOURCE select switch Push the source select switch to change
87. The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear automatic air conditioning system using the con trol switches at the rear of the center console NOORWONo 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To activate the rear control buttons press the REAR button on the front air conditioner control panel OFF button Turns rear automatic air conditioning system off Fan speed increase and decrease buttons Ad justs the rear fan speed up or down AUTO button Turns rear automatic air condition ing system on AUTO mode on Temperature increase and decrease buttons Ad justs the rear temperature up or down OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a SA maximum of 150 seconds However this is ZIAN ID not a malfunction After the coolant tempera fa ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally LHA2473 The sunload sensor located on the top driver s side of the instrument panel helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put any thing on or around this sensor Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic Type B LHA2447 J amp gt Air recirculation button A C air conditioner ON OFF button MODE manual air flow control button REAR button PON
88. The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 4 Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Number See How to say num bers in this section for more information 5 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 6 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands in this section Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the button on the steering wheel NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 133 LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call
89. These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle move
90. This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds Ifthe button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 129 Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Reco
91. This warning illuminates when the liftgate has been opened when the engine is running Timer Alert Time for a driver break This indicator appears when the set time is reached The time can be set up to 6 hours For setting the timer see Timer alert in this section Low Outside Temperature This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37 F 3 C The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit see Temperature earlier in this section Power will turn off to save the battery This warning appears in message area of the vehicle information display after a period of time if the shift selector has not moved from the P Park position CVT Error See Owner s Manual This warning illuminates when the there is a prob lem with the CVT system If this warning comes on have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 2 26 Instruments and controls Reminder Turn OFF headlights This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle Place the headlight switch to OFF or AUTO po sition For additional information see Headlight and turn signal switch in this section Low Oil Pressure This warning appears in message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected This gauge is not designed to indicated low oil level The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level Use the dipstick to check
92. Vehicle is not driven regularly and or only driven short distances In these cases the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health REMOTE START if so equipped Vehicles started with the remote start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift selector can be moved from the P Park position To place the ignition switch to the ON position follow these steps 1 Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you 2 Apply the brake 3 Press the ignition switch once to the ON position For additional information see NISSAN Intelli gent Key in the Pre driving checks and ad justments section of this manual DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT The Continuously Variable Transmission CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to pro duce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment Engine power may be automatically re duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position This CVT is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depresse
93. WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock When the Text key is selected with the NISSAN controller on the display while the radio is playing additional information is displayed on the screen If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC button When the DISC button is pressed with the sys tem off and a compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded with the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play lt lt Ppl SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT 4 button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip
94. accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible ACAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer Appearance and care 7 7 MEMO 7 8 Appearance and care 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0 cece eee eee 8 2 General maintenance 200 eee eee eee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautions n 0 cece eee eee 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system 00 cece eee eee 8 7 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Changing engine coolant 005 8 8 Engng Olhis cic icaccw eatedas oven SEENE E eee eaRe 8 9 Checking engine oil level 0 08 8 9 Changing engine oil
95. an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condition Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing Technical and consumer information 9 31 EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various system
96. and curtain and roll over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear im pact or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING e The seat belts the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean WRS0032 against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown AWARNING in the previous illustrations e When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially care ful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55
97. and supplemental restraint system LRS2138 LRS2139 3rd row bench seat Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located in the following loca tions 2nd row bench on the bottom of the seat back in the seating positions shown 3rd row bench on the bottom of the seat back on the passenger side seating position as shown If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap consult your NISSAN dealer for de tails REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions WRS0801 WRS0802 Rear facing web mounted step 2 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 LRS0673 Rear facing step 3 3 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the ch
98. and then oper ate the navigation system AWARNING e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving e Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 Settings Navigation Volume amp Beeps Audio Display Phone Clock Bluetooth Others Adjust navigation settings LHA1227 Settings gt Volume amp Beeps 8 00 emerson ee Ringtone Jeceec eccces Incoming Call C ovccc occees PHO Outgoing Call lt fec eeg OS Switch Beeps ON 217 6 Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1228 Phone gt Device Name 8 00 0660 8009 0200 f 0000 AOAO OOO O O OOO G00 Delete Lowercase OK LHA1230 Touch screen operation With this system the same operations as those for the NISSAN controller are possible using the touch screen operation Selecting the item Touch an item to select To select the Naviga tion key touch the Navigation key on the screen Touch the BACK key to return to the previous screen Adjusting the item Touch the key or the key to adjust the settings of an item Touch the
99. audio phone and voice recognition systems MP3 WMA CD All Disc Repeat 1 Disc Repeat 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Disc Random 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random All Disc Repeat All Disc Repeat All discs loaded will be re peated 1 Disc Repeat The disc that is currently playing will be repeated 1 Track Repeat The track that is currently playing will be repeated 1 Folder Repeat The folder that is currently being accessed will be repeated All Disc Random All discs loaded will be played in a mixed order 1 Disc Random The tracks on the disc that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order 1 Folder Random The tracks in the folder that is currently being accessed will be played in a mixed order SCAN button While listening to a CD press the SCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD playing Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10 second period stops the scan and the CD remains on that track CD EJECT Current Selected disc Press the button then press the slot number 1 6 for the desired disc The compact disc will be ejected If no slot num ber 1 6 is pressed the current loaded disc will be ejected If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds the disc will reload All discs Press and hold the amp button for more than 1 5 seconds The compact discs will be ejected one by one If a disc is n
100. automatically by default To ensure that this feature is activated press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key The Auto Downloaded selection should have the amber indicator next to the word ON activated Select the Auto Downloaded key to toggle this feature on or off To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle manually follow these steps 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Phone key 3 Select the Download Handset Phonebook key Once the handset phonebook is transferred to the vehicle it can be accessed by pressing the PHONE key on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel then selecting the Handset Phonebook key Whether the handset phonebook is transferred manually or automatically the process can take up to five minutes to complete depending on the size of the handset phonebook See the cellular phone s owner s manual for more details Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 147 Phone GD Yul 8 00 saco Vehicle Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Call History Connect Phone Handset Phonebook Connected Phones J Dial Number J Calls a phonebook entry saved to the vehicle LHA1322 MAKING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below 1 Press the button on the steering wheel The Phone screen
101. be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function in this sec tion Selecting the memorized position Set the shift selector to the P Park position then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 or e Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 The driver s seat steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat and automatic operation steering column will au tomatically move when the shift selector is in the P Park position This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The driver s seat will slide backward and the steering column will move up When the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 37 W
102. center 7 Insert a J nut into the license plate bracket before placing the license plate bracket on the fascia 8 Install the license plate bracket with screws 9 Install the license plate with bolts that are no longer than 0 55 in 14 mm VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion
103. clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to acci dents and could result in serious per sonal injury If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system and or interference with the brake discs drums Such inter ference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions e When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN retailer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPM
104. close is done for the disc Check if the CD USB device is protected by copyright Check if the CD is scratched or dirty If there are many folders or file levels on the CD USB device or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by copyright protection the player will skip to the next song The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD DVD or USB with Compressed Audio Files models with Navigation System The file types supported by this system are MP3 WMA AAC M4A and ATRACS Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion
105. components e Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 Spare tire size SS ER Vehicle load limit See loading infor TIRGIANO LOADING INFORMATION TT imma COLO TIREPRESSURE on mation in the Technical and con INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROIO DENAIN sumer information section Ea FRONT ADDITIONAL SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL Eg xxxkPa xxPsI INFORMATION NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL Beas REAR VOIR LE MANUEL ierre The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg of XXXX Ibs Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamals depasser XXX kg ou XXXX b LDI2083 Tire and loading information label Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle hours or driven less than 1 mile Original tire size The size of the tires 1 6 km at moderate speeds The originally installed on the vehicle at recommended c
106. conve nience feature It is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed The four corners of the vehicle in par ticular are blind spots where objects do not appear in the bird eye front or rear views Always look out the windows and check with your own eyes to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle Always operate the vehicle slowly e The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers Do not use the Around View Monitor with the outside mirror in the stored position and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Around View Monitor e The distance between objects viewed on the Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance e The cameras are installed on the front grille the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate Do not put anything on the cameras 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the cameras Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock e Do not strike the cameras They are precision instruments Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock A CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or s
107. could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased A CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped LRS2160 LRS2161 LRS2202 Forward and backward Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback p
108. eee e eee ee eee 7 4 Washing 2a cccreseee es cree teat eticwaweas ates 7 2 EIGOF Mats waked incr eGdee ae heaeaneade oe es 7 5 Waxing ess seathnar nna EAA EEEREN ERE 7 2 Seat Helis oei carecneerseivewtsoqumecesenneesas 7 6 Removing Spots 6 e eee ee cece eee teens 7 3 Cleaning the seat tracks 00005 7 6 Underbody eee cece cece cece cece eee 7 3 Corrosion protectio serieren anen iae ia 7 6 E ETE EE A 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle Aluminum alloy wheels assassine 7 3 COMOSION a pse Ba aa A EEE a give Rae E 7 6 Chrome parts 20 66sec eee eee eee eee eee 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of Tire dressingS suiet 7 3 COMOSION 2 ea EE NRE EE ETRE NEN 7 6 Cleaning interior 20 0 60s eee tere etter 7 4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 7 Air fresheners 000 c cece ete cence eens 7 4 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is
109. enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle lift up on the seatback lever located on the upper outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat This will release the seatback tilt the seat and then release the tracks so you will be able to slide the seat forward or backward Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position push the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 A CAUTION When returning the seat to its original position confirm that the seat and seat back are locked properly e Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk in seat e Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped up Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat to pinch hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat Make sure the seat path is clear of all objects before moving the seat Exiting the 3rd row To exit the 3rd row from either seating position lift the upper seatback release lever to the upper most position This will release the back of the seat fold the seat cushion up and release the tracks Slide the entire seat forward To return the seat to a locked position push the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked ACAUTION When returning the seat to its original position confirm th
110. follows 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position 2 Push the ignition switch The ignition switch position will change to the ON position 3 Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position The shift selector can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed If the battery of the vehicle is discharged the push button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual LSD2020 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis charged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location the Intelligent Key sys tem s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range itis possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the ignition switch to start the engine The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle The luggage area is not included in the op erating range but the Intelligent Key may function If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru
111. for approximately 5 seconds or until 3 beeps are heard The liftgate will open to the selected position setting To change the position of the liftgate repeat steps 1 3 for setting the position of the liftgate FUEL FILLER DOOR eca LPD2110 OPENING THE FUEL FILLER DOOR The fuel filler door automatically unlocks when the driver s door is unlocked 1 Unlock the fuel filler door using one of the following operations Unlock the driver s door with the keyfob Unlock the driver s door with the key Push the power door lock switch to the unlock position Push the door handle request switch 2 To open the fuel filler door push the right side of the fuel filler door to release Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 To lock close the fuel filler door securely and lock the doors FUEL FILLER CAP AWARNING e Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling e Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire e Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel syste
112. fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 If anew fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts LDI2092 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the glove box to access the fuse box cover 3 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller WDI0452 Type A 5 If the fuse is open replace it with an equivalent good fuse 6 Push the fuse box cover to install 7 If anew fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 LDI0456 Type B 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself
113. if so equipped The duration of the automatic headlights can be changed from O to 180 seconds From the Ve hicle Settings menu select Light Off Delay Use the ENTER button to change the duration Wiper with Speed The wiper with speed can be set to be ON or OFF From the Vehicle Settings menu select Wiper with Speed Use the ENTER button to turn this feature ON or OFF I Key Door Lock if so equipped From the Vehicle Settings menu select I Key Door Lock When this item is turned on the request switch on the door is activated When this item is turned off the request switch on the door is deactivated Use the ENTER button to activate this function Selective Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock Instruments and controls 2 21 operation is performed once From the Vehicle Settings menu select Selective Unlock Use the ENTER button to activate this function Auto Door Unlock The auto door unlock function automatically un locks all the doors when the shift selector lever is placed in the P P
114. indicated by stamped ar rows on the side of the frame The jack should be used on firm and level ground 3 Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown 4 To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground In case of emergency 6 7 LCE2043 WCE0056 If the lug nut wrench jack handle contacts the ground while raising the vehicle disas semble the lug nut wrench from the jack extension rod rotate it 90 degrees and re assemble 5 Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire 6 8 Incase of emergency Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated Lower the vehicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could caus
115. is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Technical and consumer information 9 13 Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label 9 14 Technical and consumer information To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Occupants Luggage Ri CA 150 Ib x 2 300 Iib 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg
116. left screens Press the preferred side L or R of the DISP button to adjust the rear display settings Sound To change the language press the SOUND but ton Each time the button is pressed the lan guage will change to each language stored in the DVD Track Channel Press to skip to the previous or next DVD scene selection Rear display settings To adjust the rear display settings select the preferred key and press the ENTER button The following settings are available Aspect Select the display size from CINEMA WIDE FULL or NORMAL using the joystick on the remote controller Picture Mode To adjust the display brightness automatically select the Brightness key and then select from Darker Normal or Brighter When adjusting manually select OFF and adjust using the joy stick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left To adjust tint color contrast or black level select a key using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left Press the BACK button on the remote controller to apply the settings and return to the previous display To return the adjustment levels to the default value select Execute next to Initialization us ing the joystick on the remote controller and press the ENTER button The Execute key is deactivated when the picture mode settings are already in
117. light illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The light should turn off after a few driving trips Ifthe L light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle in spected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage LPD2082 LPD2066 To remove the fuel filler cap 1 Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise to remove 2 Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling To install the fuel filler cap 1 Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube 2 Turn the fuel filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard Loose Fuel Cap warning The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed To turn off the warning perform the following 1 Remove and install the fuel filler cap as soon as possible See Fuel filler cap 2 Tighten the fuel filler cap until it clicks 3 Press the next button on the steer ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warn
118. light will turn off after about 2 sec onds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the indicator light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dy namic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal Sto 4WD AUTO indicator light if Hi so equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Four Wheel Drive 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminates and then turns off When selecting 4WD AUTO mode while the engine is running the 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminates See Intelligent 4WD system if so equipped in the Starting and driving section awo AWD LOCK indicator light if so equipped When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Four Wheel Drive 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates and then turns off When selecting 4WD LOCK mode while the engine is running the 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates simultaneously with the 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminating See Intelligent 4WD system if so equipped in the Starting and driving section A CAUTION Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the LOCK mode AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a hi
119. low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected HORN HEATED SEATS if so equipped LIC2227 BESE LIC1543 To sound the horn push near the horn icon of the steering wheel A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury The front seats are warmed by built in heaters 1 Start the engine 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat Use of the seat heater by such people could result in se rious injury A CAUTION e The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat e Do not put anything on the seat which insu
120. making an announcement How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule e Only single digits 0 zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the sys tem will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition performance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 157 Standard Mode command list Category Command COMMAND ACTION Displays Phone functio
121. may cause unde sired operation of the device Instruments and controls 2 67 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments KEYS errei sinini EEE toe sad deen EOE cea 3 2 NISSAN Intelligent Key 00 3 2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys 3 4 DOOlS8 ii edieeee tetce banter T ta dgee T 3 5 Locking With Kayi s iesssi res dace lean wontons nan 3 5 Locking with inside lock knob 0008 3 6 Locking with power door lock switch 3 6 Automatic door locks 1 0 0 0 c cece 3 6 Child safety rear door lock 0 00005 3 7 NISSAN Intelligent Key 00000 3 7 Operating anges i iiorc increta udededons edie ies 3 9 Door locks unlocks precaution 005 3 10 NISSAN Intelligent Key Operation 3 10 How to use the remote keyless entry TUNCUON cic erora pinning tii bie Deen a 3 13 Warning sig alS ss c c2ccisccen asadedeaseeneuas 3 17 Troubleshooting guide 0c eee eee 3 18 Remote Engine Start if so equipped 3 20 Remote engine start operating range 3 20 Remote starting the vehicle 008 3 20 Extending engine run time e eee 3 21 Canceling a remote start 00 3 21 Conditions the remote start will not work 3 21 a 0016 a ee eee eee 3 22 LitQate icacconiideceiearetientes dyaaers keene oe 3 22 Operating the manual liftgate if so equipped 6
122. ment panel inside the glove box storage bin or door pocket the Intelligent Key may not function If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle the Intelligent Key may function PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in this position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off OFF The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min utes under the following conditions all doors are closed shift selection lever is in P Park The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur any door is opened shift selection lever is moved out of P Park ignition switch changes position ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories Starting and driving 5 11 A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when
123. minutes without starting the engine The front display is designed not to show the images while driving as the driver s attention must be given to vehicle opera tion for safety Sounds are available To show the images in the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake SYSTEM COMPONENTS Rear displays A CAUTION e The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash imme diately with soap and water e Use soft damp cloth when cleaning the Dual Head Restraint DVD System com ponents Do not use solvents or clean ing solutions SAA3329 LHA2210 The rear displays are located on the back of the front head restraints Use the remote controller to operate the rear display screen Push the preferred side L or R of the power ON OFF button on the remote controller to acti vate the rear display The rear screens can also be activated using the NISSAN controller For more information see Rear display settings in this section Do not block the range of the wireless remote controller receiver and wireless headphones transmitter The angle of the rear display screen can be adjusted for optimal viewing Gently apply pressure to the base of the screen where indic
124. mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tir
125. more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID A CAUTION e Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 Do not mix with other fluids e Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the warranty When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 POWER STEERING FLUID LDI2146 Check the fluid level in the reservoir The fluid level should be checked when the fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86 F 0 to 30 C The fluid level can be checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap To check the fluid level remove the cap The fluid level should be between the MAX C and MIN lines If the fluid is below the MIN 2 line add Genuine NISSAN E PSF Remove the cap and fill through the opening 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself A CAUTION e Do not overfill e Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly e Power steering fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children BRAKE FLUID AWARNING e Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of imprope
126. non viewable area is highlighted 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems in yellow for three seconds after the bird eye view is displayed In addition the non viewable cor ners are displayed in red and blink for the first three seconds to remind the driver to be cautious AWARNING e Objects in the bird eye view will appear further than the actual distance be cause the bird eye view is a pseudo view that is processed by combining the views from the cameras on the outside mirrors the front and the rear of the vehicle Tall objects such as a curb or vehicle may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views e Objects that are above the camera can not be displayed The view of the bird eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters e Aline on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle sannnnnae _Q Front side view Guiding lines Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor The front of vehicle line shows the front part of the vehicle The side of vehicle line 2 shows the vehicle width including the outside mirror The extensions of both the front Q and side lines are shown with a green dotted line The rear sonar indicator will appear when the rea
127. normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving conditions the VDC System helps to perform the following functions Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed traction control function Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following condi t
128. of service and repair information for your vehicle This manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer ships Genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals can also be purchased For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals contact 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual for this model year and prior please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone number and loca tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you 10 Index A Air bag See supplemental restraint SYSTEM 25 gtk ated are ae 4s OG Sees 1 49 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact airbag system 1 56 Air bag warning labels 0 1 64 Air bag warning light 2 0 1 64 2 14 Air cleaner housing filter 8 18 Air conditioner Air conditioner service 4 58 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 9 6 Heater and air conditioner CONTOISs d a a ae a 4 50 4 55 Rear seat air conditioner 4 52 Servicing air conditioner 4 58 Alarm system See
129. of an audio track can reduce the file size by ap proximately 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no percep tible loss in quality The compression re duces certain parts of sound that seem in audible to most people WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Micro soft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality AAC M4A Advanced Audio Coding AAC is a lossy audio compression format Audio files that have been encoded with AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver a higher quality of sound than MP3 ATRAC3 ATRAC3 Plus Adaptive Trans form Acoustic Coding ATRAC is a lossy audio compression format developed by Sony Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession e ID3 WMA Tag T
130. of the head restraint as shown 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the bottom of the seatback behind the child restraint If the headrest is removed store it in a se 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the cure place Be sure to reinstall the headrest manufacturer s instructions to remove any when the child restraint is removed See LRS2139 slack Make sure the head restraint does not Adjustable headrest in this section 3rd row bench seat contact the top tether strap for headrest adjustment removal and installation information 1 Top tether strap If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap consult your NISSAN 2 Anchor point dealer for details 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the bottom of the seatback INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP behind the child restraint 3rd row bench seat 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any AWARNING slack Make sure the head restraint does not contact the top tether strap In the 3rd row bench seat a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used on If you have any questions when installing a the passenger side seating position Do top tether strap consult your NISSAN not place in the driver s side seating posi dealer for details tion and attempt to angle the tether strap to the passenger side seating position Safety Seats seat belts and suppl
131. off and the compact disc will start to play lt lt gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT M4 button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK PPI button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The NISSAN controller can also be used to se lect tracks when a CD is being played lt lt gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind and Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or the TRACK gt fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing a CD with compressed audio files turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to play the next or previous folder Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 91 co 8 00 Artist TUNE 3 Folder XXXXXXXK Album XXXXXXXX Track XXXXXXXX Folder 1of
132. oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected immediately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody oth erwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care sec tion of this manual Win
133. operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is low an indi cator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Dis play See Vehicle Information Display in the Instruments and controls section Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer ACAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key e Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object e Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended perio
134. or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely e The player may skip while driving on rough roads e The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is ex tremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use Do not expose the CD to direct sun light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly e Copy control compact discs CCCD e Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc e Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of t
135. perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on it You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions
136. play key tobegin the slideshow The images shown on the screen will periodically change at a given interval of time To skip through the images without waiting for them to change automatically select the M4 key to skip back ward or the PP key to skip forward Select the stop key MH to end the slideshow and return to the full screen display of the image currently on the screen Settings gt Slideshow Settings 8 00 Slideshow Speed 5 sec Slideshow Order Order List LHA1311 Settings gt Slideshow Speed 8 00 No Auto Change 5 sec 10 sec 30 sec 60 sec L LHA1312 Settings gt Slideshow Order 8 00 Random Order List LHA1313 Slideshow settings While in slideshow mode select the Settings key The Slideshow Settings screen will be dis played The following settings can be accessed Slideshow speed To change the interval of time at which images are changed during a slideshow select the desired interval key The indicator light to the right of the interval will come on to show that it is selected If the option No Auto Change is chosen the slideshow will not change images automatically The slideshow can then only be operated using the manual controls To return to the slideshow screen select the Back key or press th
137. push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli gent Key is outside the vehicle After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door LPD2104 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of opera tion LPD2105 me eS LPD2106 Locking doors 1 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelli gent Key with you 2 Close all doors Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you All doors and the rear liftgate will lock 5 The hazard warn
138. recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Ifyou are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle ACAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 127 microphone location LHA2476 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connecting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when 4 128 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems the ignition switch is placed i
139. return the 3rd row seats to a seating position 1 Use the pull straps to raise each seat back Pull back until the seatback latches into position Make sure to properly raise each seatback to an upright and se cured position 2 Do not use the pull strap to return the head restraint to the upright position Pull back on the head restraint until it latches in the up right position AWARNING When the seat is returned to the normal seating position the head restraints must be returned to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants SEAT BELTS Mf Uf Sit upright and well back i eel SS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 21 Sit upright and weil back
140. road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol not be used while towing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break Technical and consumer information 9 27
141. sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to 8 seconds correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode For information about the automatic anti glare feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust ments section t WIC0904 Type A COMPASS DISPLAY Pushthe or A button for about 1 sec ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass direction display on or off The display will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading N North E East S South W West Fe Merne N s LIC1487 Type B If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles Instruments and controls 2 7 Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Press and hold the button for about 11 seconds or the butt
142. so equipped 4 141 Regulatory Information 00 eee ee 4 143 Voice Commands sace 6c irmo aes si dower 4 143 Connecting procedure 2 2000 4 143 Vehicle phonebook 00 0c cece eee eee 4 145 Handset phonebook 020 cess eens 4 147 MAKING aall aie 252 sire neas enoten rota ldare Brad 4 148 Receiving aicall sss dicccised haan isien tad 4 148 During a Callesse cirie sucess ae ged ad og 4 149 Ending a Call ccc ce eede kadai tala E Ei 4 150 PHONESCUHINGS i5 ed etitedtdcdet rate oa 4 150 Bluetooth Settings cissie ion kipee aurten 4 151 Call VOIUMG sorsi cnctineriisrenn ndior 4 152 NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped 2 cece cece eee eee ees 4 152 NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode 4 153 Using the system ces tec csa ties cade neeend 4 156 Before starting 2vieciiceectisddes nbn ence amen 4 156 Giving voice commands 0 05 4 156 NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode 0 0 cee eee eee 4 164 Using the system 0 6e ese eee eee ences 4 169 Speaker Adaptation function 4 172 Troubleshooting guide c cee eee ee 4 174 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or der that full attention may be given to
143. sunshade To fully close the sunshade push the switch toward the close position AWARNING e To avoid personal injury keep your hands fingers and head away from the sunshade arm the arm rail and sun shade inlet port e Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system They could be injured e Do not place objects on or near the rear sunshade This could cause improper operation or damage it e Do not pull or push the rear sunshade This could cause improper operation or damage it ACAUTION Do not place objects such as newspa pers handkerchiefs etc on the sun shade inlet port Doing so may entangle these objects in the sunshade when it is extending or retracting causing im proper operation or damage to the sunshade Instruments and controls 2 55 e Do not push the sunshade arm with your hands etc as this may deform it Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result e Do not put any object into the sunshade inlet port as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade e Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade e Do not forcefully pull the sunshade Do ing so may elongate the sunshade Im proper operation or damage to the sun shade may result Restarting the sunshade switch If the sunshade does not operate properly per form the following procedure to initialize the sun shade operation
144. that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Technical and consumer information 9 5 Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents 9 6 Technical and consumer information ACAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer
145. the IV is on the mirror use the procedure in this section to program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver Otherwise use the procedure in HomeLink universal transceiver Type A if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver e Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver is programmed retain the original transmitter for future programming proce dures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section AWARNING e Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a
146. the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation firmware version 1 2 3 or later iPod Classic firmware version 1 1 1 or later iPod Touch firmware version 2 0 0 or later iPod Nano 1st generation firmware ver sion 1 3 1 or later e iPod Nano 2nd generation firmware ver sion 1 1 3 or later iPod Nano 3rd generation firmware ver sion 1 1 3 or later iPod Nano 4th generation firmware ver sion 1 0 4 or later e iPod Nano 5th generation firmware ver sion 1 0 1 or later Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above 4 106 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 8 00 Artist XXXXXX Album XXXXXX Track XXXXXX Q Shuffle Songs Repeat All 2 10 LHA1397 Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Press the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the iPod DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected the system will turn on If another audio source is pla
147. the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove e Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves e Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer Appearance and care 7 3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean witha dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This
148. the default value Color System To choose the color system select from NTSC PAL PAL 60 PAL M PAL N or AUTO using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left 3D Y C filter Set to ON OFF using the joystick on the remote controller When turned on small characters and an outline of the shapes will be displayed more clearly than when turned off AUX Volume Setting To set the AUX volume select from High Low or Middle using the joystick on the remote con troller and tilt the joystick to the right or left OPERATING TIPS The images from a device that is connected to the rear auxiliary input jacks cannot be viewed on the front displays Itis not possible to switch the source to USB if so equipped or DVD using the remote controller when the rear display is in the AUX mode Push the AUX L R button in the remote controller and turn off the AUX mode and then push the preferred mode switch Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 125 It is not possible to display different video files such as DVD or video files in the USB memory on the front and rear displays at the same time It is not possible to play an audio file and a video file in the same USB memory at the same time Multiple source display It is possible to play different sources on each display The following example shows h
149. the footwell lights if so equipped step lights if so equipped map lights and rear personal lights will automatically turn on and stay on for a period of time when The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent Key a key or the request switch if so equipped while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position When individually pushed When the OFF switch is pushed the interior lights do not illuminate even when pushed NOTE The footwell lights and step lights illumi nate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery ag Zl lils TA O D LIC2303 CONSOLE LIGHT if so equipped The console light will turn on whenever the park ing lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control Instruments and controls 2 57 PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT oL LIC1413 LIC2304 SIC2063A To turn on the personal lights press and release the switch To turn the personal lights off press and release the switch 2 58 Instruments and controls P
150. the housing 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the ve hicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pres sure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information lab
151. the liftgate closes The switch on the liftgate can only be used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate main switch is in the ON position Reverse The power liftgate will reverse direction immedi ately during power open or power close if the keyfob instrument panel or liftgate switch is pushed or if the liftgate opener switch is pushed A chime will sound to announce the reversal Auto Reverse If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position If a second obstacle is detected the liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will enter manual mode A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close the liftgate will reverse direc tion and return to the full open position NOTE If the pinch strip is damaged or removed the power close function will not operate AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure thai all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate LPD2108 Manual Mode If power operation is not available the liftgate may be operated manually Power operation may not be available if the power liftgate main switch is in the ON position if multiple obstacles have been detected i
152. the same time Turning the key toward the front Q of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds un locks all doors Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released NOTE When the window lock button is pressed the key will not operate the window open or close function Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 LPD2092 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD2093 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position 2
153. the seat belt without the booster seat AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 CHILD RESTRAINTS ARS1098 WRS0256 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS AWARNING e Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap Even the stron gest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Forward facing child restraint in stallation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear fac
154. the table in this section can be played Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video files The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 Requirements for Supporting Video Playback Media CD CD R CD RW DVD DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DL USB 2 0 Memory CD CD R CD RW DVD ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet UDF Bridge UDF1 02 ISO9660 UDF1 5 UDF2 0 DVD R DVD RW DVD RW __ ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported File Systems DL Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported VDF1 5 VDF2 0 packet writing is not supported USB Memory FAT16 FAT32 divx avi Video Codecs DivX3 DivX4 DivX5 DivX6 Audio Codecs MP3 MPEG2 5 Audio Layer3 AC3 LPCM File Types Audio Codec G 726 2 Mbps Mbps oi a 32x32 Resolution 720x480 a 32x32 720x576 4 74 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Y OOo vou ANELEOLODN AM FM DISC AUX gt 9 gt a LOAD SONOS DISP CLOCK SCAN Lead ar T 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 LHA2104 Poe E TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Fade Balance SSV if so equipped and Beep AUX IN jack AUX button 8 TRACK button CD ej
155. the volume control knob to adjust the vol ume The headphones will automatically turn off after about four minutes if there is no sound during that period The headphones will also turn off after approximately four hours of continuous use To prevent the battery from being discharged keep the power turned off when not in use If the sound from the headphones is not clear it may be due to interference from an infrared com munication device or a cellular phone If this happens turn down the headphone volume or stop using the headphones It is also possible that the headphones may be too far from the transmitter which is in the rear display screen This is not a malfunction The sound may also be interrupted temporarily when there is an obstacle between the head phones and the transmitter Remove the ob stacle such as opaque materials hands hair etc LHA2211 Type A Channel change When the rear displays are playing different sources slide the channel select switch to select the sound Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 117 LHA8801 Type B Left is the sound on the left display Right is the sound on the right display LHA2551 Remote control The remote controller has the following controls 1 POWER button 2 Display select switch L or R 4 118 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 11 13 14
156. time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions The shift selector is shifted to a forward or reverse gear The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake The maximum holding time is 2 seconds After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop operating completely Hill start assist will not operate when the shift selector is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level road 5 32 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual D
157. tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Check that all doors are closed Position seat and adjust head restraint Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi tion See Warning indicator lights and au dible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions 3 Push the ignition switch to the ON position Depress the brake pedal and push the igni tion switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and while holding crank the engine Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts Ifthe engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Push the ignition switch to the ON posi tion to start cranking the engine After 5 or 6 seconds stop
158. tivated the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position To unlock the door manually use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch driver s or front passen ger s side NOTE The automatic door unlock function can be changed using the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display The Auto Door Unlock choices are Off IGN OFF Shift into P LPD2049 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the LOCK position the door can be opened only from the outside NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use e The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
159. to train the HomeLink to complete the program ming which may require a ladder and an other person for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener program button quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 8 only 9 If you have any questions or are having diffi culty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons PROGRAMMING HOMELINK
160. to zero Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available See Vehicle Infor mation Display in this section TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone reduce engine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage LIC2220 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions ACAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required N sk 1 2 LIC2222 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to 0 Empty after
161. used if necessary CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for
162. vehicle security system 2 27 Anchor point locations oaaao 1 34 Antena a ai e cas oee Rao ah a ata 4 114 Anti lock brake warning light 2 10 2 11 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 27 Audible reminders a nn anaana 2 17 Audio system 6 eee ee 4 59 Bluetooth audio 4 108 Compact Disc CD changer 4 77 Compact disc CD player 4 83 4 91 FM AM radio with compact disc CD changer 0 4 4 75 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player 4 87 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player hfe eer dba es aes we aos he ag 4 80 Audio System iPod Player 4 103 4 105 Audio system Radio a omae sukai wad ada 4 59 Audio System SONGS ani date ge rg SS aed 4 81 4 87 Audio system Steering wheel audio control switch 4 112 USB interface 4 98 4 99 Autolight switch s s sss ee eee 2 33 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 35 Automatic power window switch 2 53 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 32 Automatic door locks 04 3 6 AUK JACK 2 2 t1ccn aii a S4 4on Sh ao aed 4 79 B Battery osu ere sa ee ka a Ee 8 14 Charge warning light 2 11 Before starting the engine 5 13 Belt See drive belt 8 16 Block heater ENGiING inne a ews Ree es 5 33 Bluetooth audio 00 4 108 Bluetooth hands free phone SYSTEMU shoe Shad ia n 4 127 4 141 Booster
163. voice recognition systems Avoid touching or scratching the moni tor screen as it may become dirty or damaged Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme humidity conditions less than 10 or more than 75 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your vehicle be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts AWARNING e A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full atten tion may be given to vehicle operation Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode is highly recommended Exercise extreme cau tion at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Ifyou are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle ACAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as
164. warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 sec onds if the system is operational 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system eo Pv OFF Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located near the radio controls After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status The light operates as follows e Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meet t
165. wheel switch located on the steer 8 00 Voice Recognition 3 Kd 44 Phone 4 Navigation 44 Information j Practice 4 Audio 4 Help To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1333 2 A list of commands appears on the screen and the system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Audio or Help 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to amp a command 4 Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed speak Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon is B Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted Please follow the prompts given by the sys tem If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice e Press the button on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen f you want to cancel the command press and hold the button The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is
166. when the cruise control ON OFF switch is pushed ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To prop erly set the cruise control system use the following procedures AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads e On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch on The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed e To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the
167. when the I Key Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display For additional information see Vehicle in formation display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the I
168. with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section To use the outlets for devices that require 120v power place the ignition in the ON position and push the power inverter switch The switch will illuminate when enabled A CAUTION e Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery e Do not attempt to use this while driving e Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory doing so could significantly drain the battery of your vehicle Instruments and controls 2 41 TOW MODE SWITCH TOW MODE LIC2390 Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage How ever fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual Press
169. you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle This may cause clogging or improper wind shield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself Rear window wiper blade Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replace ment is required BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspe
170. 00 English Frangais Espanol LHA1251 Settings gt Select Units 8 00 US Metric LHA1252 Language amp Units Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan guage amp Units key Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller and selecting either the Select Language key or the Select Units key Select Language Select the English key or the Frangais key to change the language shown on the display If you select the Frangais key French language will be displayed so please use the French Own er s Manual To obtain a French Owner s Manual please see Owner s Manual Service Manual Or der Information in the Technical and consumer information section Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display Voice Recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section Camera settings Select the Camera key The Camera settings screen will appear Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 When this option is on indicator light illumi nated predictive course lines will be displayed when the Around View Monitor is displayed on the screen See Around View Monitor
171. 00 662 Help Manual Controls Please say the last 4 digits or say Change Number To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1337 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 9 4 Dial 47 Change Number 800 662 6200 Manual Controls Please say Dial or say Change Number To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1338 8 The system announces Please say the last four digits or say change number 9 Say 6200 10 11 12 The system announces Dial or Change Number Say Dial The system makes a call to 800 662 6200 NOTE You can also speak 800 662 6200 10 continuous digits or 662 6200 7 con tinuous digits if the area code is not nec essary However the 3 3 4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition See How to speak numbers in this section 4 162 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems You can only say a phone number using the 3 3 4 grouping 7 digits and 10 digits using this command Please use the International Call command for all other formats and when special characters such as star pound and plus need to be entered If you say Change Number during phone number entry the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3 3 4 format In this case please say the area code first and then foll
172. 2397 LIC2311 Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window partially push the switch down lightly until the desired window position is reached To close the window partially pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch and hold it down Q To close the window pull the switch up tf D LIC0410 Automatic operation To fully open a window press the window switch down to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window automatically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs A WARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have the
173. 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the a button on the keyfob 3 36 Pre driving checks and adjustments The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion press the f button on the keyfob The driver s seat steering wheel and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Procedure for storing the outside mirror positions for best visibility when backing up An outside mirror position for backing up can be stored for each memory switch 1 and 2 1 Set the parking brake 2 Place the ignition in the ON position Do not s
174. 4 Track tofi 0 40 LHA1258 CD gt Menu 8 00 Folder List Track List Play Mode LHA1259 CD gt Play Mode 8 00 Normal 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random L LHA1262 CD menu Touch the Menu key on the display while a CD or CD with compressed audio files is playing to bring up a list of options Depending on the type of CD being played the following options may be available Play Mode This option allows you to alter the play pattern of the CD Touch the key of the mode you wish to apply The modes change the play pattern as follows 1 Track Repeat the current track is repeated 1 Disc Random tracks from the entire disc are played randomly 1 Folder Repeat compressed audio files CD only the current folder is repeated 1 Folder Random compressed audio files CD only tracks from the current folder are played randomly 4 92 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Normal Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential order until stopped CD gt Folder List 8 00 Qu XXXXXXX fa XXXXXXX fa XXXXXXX Ma XXXXXXX LHA1260 CD gt Track List 8 00 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 LHA1261 LH
175. 65 a eau nananana 3 32 Variable voltage control system 8 16 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 8 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 41 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 29 Vehicle identification 00 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 2 0 0 0 00000 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle loading information 9 13 Vehicle recovery 0 6 14 6 15 Vehicle security system 00 2 27 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 28 3 4 5 13 Ventilators s 2205 ee ee eng be 4 49 MISOFS S a se og oat Seige He sures os Sees os Gee 3 31 Voice recognition system 4 152 WwW Warning Air bag warning light 1 64 2 14 Anti lock brake warning light 2 10 2 11 Battery charge warning light 2 11 Brake warning light 0 2 11 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Low fuel warning light 2 13 2 25 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning lights ee Gree dee ae Se et aed 2 25 Passenger air bag and status light 1 58 Seat belt warning light 2 14 Vehicle security system 2 27 Warning indicator lights and audible POMINGENS k ee r ee See he BS 2 10 Warning labels for SRS 1 64 Warning lights 000 2 10 Washer switch Rear window wipe
176. A2474 Folder List The folders on the disc are displayed Select the key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from that folder Track List The tracks on the disc are displayed Select the key of a track name to begin playing that track A CD EJECT button Whenthe button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off AUX auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the center console NTSC compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks Audio devices such as some MP3 players can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden tification purposes Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input Yellow video input Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks turn off the power of the portable device With a compatible device connected to the aux iliary input jacks press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the display The output from the device will be played through the display when the vehicle is in the P Park position and t
177. ARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the climate controlled seats if you or the oc cupants can not monitor seat tempera tures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat Use of the climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury A CAUTION The battery could run down if the cli mate control seat is operated while the engine is not running Do not use the climate control seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar objects This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth The climate controlled seat has an air filter Do not operate the climate con trolled seat without an air filter This may result in damage to the system When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not oper ate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH POWER INVERTER SWITCH if so equipped e OFF LIC2315 LIC2231 The vehicle should be driven
178. Air if so equipped 20 TPMS Error 21 Remote Start if so equipped 22 Loose Fuel Cap No Key Detected This warning appears when the intelligent key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch is the ON or ACC position Make sure the Intelli gent Key is inside the vehicle Key ID Incorrect This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the intelligent key is not recognized by the system You can not start the engine with an unregistered key See NISSAN Intelligent Key in Pre driving checks and adjustments for more information Shift to Park This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift selector is in any position other than P Park position Also a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position If this warning illuminates move the shift selector to the P Park position or start the engine For additional information about Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Push ignition to OFF After the Push ignition to OFF warning illumi nates the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position when the shift selector is moved to the P Park position To turn off the Push warning place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position Key Battery Low This indicator illuminate
179. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VO35DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 6 cylinder V block Slanted at 60 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 780 x 3 189 96 x 81 Displacement cu in cm 213 45 3 498 Firing order 1 2 3 4 5 6 Idle speed CVT in N position Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle Spark plug FXE22HR 11 Spark plug gap Nominal 0 043 1 1 No adjustment is necessary Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 Technical and consumer information 9 7 WHEELS AND TIRES Wheel type Offset in mm Size Aluminum 1 97 50 18x 7 5 1 97 50 20 x 7 5 Spare Wheel Steel 18 x4T Tire size 235 65R18 235 55R20 Spare tire T165 90D18 9 8 Technical and consumer information DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Overall length Overall width Overall height without roof rack with roof rack Front and Rear Track Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in mm in mm i
180. CDs DVDs with a paper label CDs DVDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges e This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs DVDs It has no capa bilities to record or burn CDs DVDs If the CD DVD cannot be played one of the following messages will be dis played Disc Read Error Confirm that the CD DVD is inserted correctly the label side is facing up etc e Confirm that the CD DVD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches Please Eject Disc This error may be due to the tempera ture inside the player getting too high Remove the CD DVD by pushing the EJECT button and after a short time reinsert the CD DVD The CD DVD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal If the error persists consult your local dealership Unplayable File e The file may be copy protected e The file is not MP3 WMA AAC M4A or DIVX type Region Invalid e The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions e Use DVDs with a region code 1 ALL or 1 included for your DVD entertainment system The region code is displayed as a small sym bol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a re gion code other than 1 or ALL 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA0484 Copyright and trademark e The technology protected by the U S patent and oth
181. D display reappears If the control knob is not pressed for approxi mately 10 seconds the radio or CD display will automatically reappear Settings 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Display Others Bluetooth LHA1236 LHA1236 Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5 press the SETTING button Then select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller then press the EN TER button the audio settings screen will be displayed Select the key or key to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the BACK button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 Settings gt Audio 8 00 Bass C cccccccceg DO Treble C cccccccces gt a cocccccceg R gt Balance rc Fade Q coccccceeg F gt speed Sensitive Vol lt PALCOS te 1 7 Adjust bass LHA1256 Settings gt Audio 8 00 Balance LO ccccccceeg RE Fade R F ccccccccey F gt Speed Sensitive Vol teeeeen gt DivX Registration Code Display Album Cover Art eon LHA1257 8 00 Artist TUNE 3 Folder XXXXXXXK Album XXXXXXX
182. Drive AUTO or LOCK mode depending on the driving condi tions Turn the 4WD mode switch located on the cen ter console to select AUTO 2WD or LOCK e AUTO Turn the 4WD mode switch to the neutral AUTO position The Four Wheel Drive 4WD AUTO indicator light the meter illuminates 2WD Turn the 4WD mode switch clock wise to the 2WD position LOCK To engage the LOCK mode turn the 4WD mode switch counterclockwise to the LOCK position The switch will return to the AUTO position automatically and the Four Wheel Drive 4WD LOCK indicator light koc Ea in the meter illuminates To dis engage the LOCK mode turn the switch to the LOCK position again The switch will return to the AUTO position automatically and the 4WD LOCK indicator light turns off The LOCK mode will automatically be can celled when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ii mgde indic eon light 4WD mode Wheels driven Use conditions Front wheels The wheel drive mode is in Two Wheel Drive 2WD when driving on a normal road Distribution of torque to the front and rear wheels changes automatically depending on road conditions encountered ratio 100 0 2WD gt 50 50 4WD This results in improved driving stability LOCK e Drive 4WD For driving on dry paved roads For driving on paved or slippery roads For driving on rough roads 1 The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically de
183. Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness perform the following procedure 1 Open the driver door Move the seat to the rearmost position LTI2045 LTI2046 2 Locate the jumper harness connector under the lower portion of the instrument panel The connector is taped to the wiring harness as indicated The connector is marked with a white tag with elec brake conn Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness WIRE COLOR NOTE WHITE Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller BLACK ee Brake controller ground WHITE Trailer brake controller pee emedo GREEN Fused trailer brake con fo os troller battery feed B 3 Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector 4 Release the parking brake 5 Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer s instructions Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down con
184. For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section 2 NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Oil available at a NISSAN dealer 3 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 4 Use of power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly 5 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer 6 For further details see Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in this section 7 For further details see Engine Oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual 8 The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non warranty vehicle repairs 9 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 A CAUTION e Only vehicles with the E 85 filler door label can operate on E 85 Fuel system or other damage can occur if E 85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E 85 e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gaso
185. GCWR 6 350 Ib 2 880 kg GVW 9 123 Ib 4 138 kg Capacity available for towing 900 Ib 409 kg Available tongue weight 8 750 lb 3 969 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION CHART Maximum Towing Capacity 1 U S and Canada 5 000Ib 2 268 kg Maximum Tongue Load 500 lb 227 kg Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 10 000 Ib 4 536 kg 1 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi cle s maximum towin
186. Mode in this section To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode See Speaker Adaptation Function in this section Otherwise it is recommended that Alter nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition perfor mance While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys tem for certain Phone and Navigation features you can switch to using manual controls touch screen NISSAN controller steering wheel con trols and the information you have already en tered by voice control will be retained To switch to manual controls select the Manual Controls key on the display when it appears The system will respond by speaking Changing to manual operation Please use manual controls to con tinue For the voice commands for the navigation sys tem refer to the Navigation System Owner s Manual of your vehicle For vehicles in the U S the factory default setting is the Standard Mode See Standard Mode in this section For vehicles in Canada the factory default setting is the Alternate Command Mode See Alternate Command Mode in this section NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The Standard Mode enables control of naviga tion phone and vehicle information With this setting active commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by Using t
187. N NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is located as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration The vehicle identification number VIN number is also available through the center display screen See your Navigation System Owner s Manual for further information VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 9 LT12034 WT10058 Za oN WTI0167 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown 9 10 Technical and consumer information F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown oR y t j f EA LT10084 WT10173 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to Loading I
188. NTER button To turn off the subtitles press and hold the EN TER button until a beep sounds Display Mode DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cin ema mode using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button 4 124 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button Remote controller operation Use the remote controller to adjust the following items Rear display ON OFF The rear displays can be activated or deactivated individually To activate or deactivate the rear displays press the preferred side L or R of the ON OFF button on the remote controller Joystick Use the joystick to select the items displayed on the rear screen ENTER button Press the ENTER button to make the selected item complete on the rear screen BACK button Press to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selection DVD mode Press the DVD button to select the DVD mode AUX mode The AUX auxiliary input jacks modes can be activated or deactivated individually To activate the AUX mode press the preferred side L or R of the AUX button Press the AUX button again to deactivate the AUX mode and display another mode Volume To control the volume level push the VOL button A or M Display Display settings can be set individually for the right and
189. O button 20005 4 6 How to use the SETTING button 4 9 THD OFF button 0c cece ceccceeeeeeees 4 15 Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System if so equipped 05 4 16 How to use the NISSAN controller 4 17 How to use the touch screen 4 17 How to select menus on the screen 4 19 How to use the STATUS button 4 20 How to use the INFO button 0008 4 20 How to use the SETTING button 4 23 THD OFF button 0c cece cecceeeeeeeees 4 30 Image viewer if so equipped eee eee 4 31 Using the image viewer c cee e eee ee 4 31 RearView Monitor if so equipped 0200 4 34 How to read the displayed lines 00 4 34 How to park with predictive course lines 4 35 Difference between predicted and actual Co lEn ere R EEE E E E EEE 4 36 Predictive course line settings 08 4 38 How to adjust the screen eee eee 4 38 Operating tips rs snr inian e eee eee eee ee 4 39 Around View Monitor if so equipped 4 39 Available VieWS reesti tiss eee ee cee eee eee 4 40 Difference between predictive and actual CiStanCeS ec savdersee stan vohawtdaweies E 4 43 How to switch the display 0 008 4 46 Camera aiding sonar parking sensor 4 46 How to adjust the screen view
190. OFF position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately A oe knob turned to LOCK a Seconds andiall the doors unlock The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you When pushing the door handle request switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli gent Key to lock the door When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle The outside chime sounds for approximately acetonide The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments Replace the battery with a new one See The battery charge is low Battery replacement in the Maintenance and do it yourself section When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the display The No Key Detected warning appears on the display the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning light in It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Contact a NISSAN dealer the meter illuminates in yellow Key system Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 REMOTE ENGINE START if so equipped LPD2060 The Q _ button will be on the NISSAN Intelli gent Key if the vehi
191. Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h BREAK IN SCHEDULE ACAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance e Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS Follow these easy to use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle 1 Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application e Avoid rapid starts and stops e Use smooth gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible Maintain constant speed while commut ing and coast whenever possible 2 Maintain Constant Speed Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini mize stops Synchronizing your speed with traffic li
192. RAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e Ascraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed un
193. RB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb e HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb e HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves 4 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 5 26 Starting and driving POWER STEERING AWARNING e If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running there will be no power assist for the steering You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer The power steering system is designed to pro vide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced This is to prevent over heating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged While the power assist is reduced steering wheel operation will become heavy If the steering wheel operat
194. RDM button is pressed while the USB memory is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat All 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Random 1 Folder Random Repeat All LHA2475 This USB device contains multisession contents Please select item to play Play Movie Contents Play Audio Contents LHA1378 USB INTERFACE models with Navigation System Connecting a device to the USB input jack A CAUTION Depending on size and shape of USB device the console lid may not fully close Do not force console lid closed as this may damage USB device Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 e Do not force the USB device into the USB port Inserting the USB device tilted or up side down into the port may damage the USB device and the port Make sure that the USB device is con nected correctly into the USB port Some USB devices come witha mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be fore inserting the device Do not locate objects near the USB de vice to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB device and the port Pres sure from the objects may damage the USB device and the port The USB input jack is located in the center con sole Insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio and video files on th
195. RIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Bulb No Wattage W Headlight assembly High Low Park Turn Sidemarker Front fog lights if so equipped Daytime running lights Canada only Map light Footwell light Personal lights Glove box light Step light Courtesy light Vanity mirror light Cargo light High mounted stop light Rear combination light Tail Stop Turn Rear sidemarker Backup reversing License plate light See a NISSAN dealer for replacement 60 HB3 55 H11 5 W5W 21 WY21W 5 WY5W 55 H11 19 PS19W 3 4 158 P1Y 158 194 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 LDI2160 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself PONH oND Headlight assembly Map light Personal light Fog light if so equipped Daytime running light Canada only if so equipped Cargo light Courtesy light Rear combination light License plate light WDI0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover it Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation s X LBS aa Q ECA O WDI0670 LDI2096 Personal lights Vanity mirror Use a cloth to protect the housing Use a cloth to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 WDI10206 Cargo light Use a cloth to protect
196. RS0681 Forward facing step 6 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 2 through 8 PY OFF Forward facing step 10 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger a
197. S e Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet E3z3 Four wheel drive models ACAUTION Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam age the transmission transfer case and differential gears Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 If excessive tire wear is found it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size brand construction and tread pattern The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary Contact a NISSAN dealer Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional info
198. S0671 Forward facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0697 Forward facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH at tachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mod
199. SOM NOAA w MENU button Directional buttons SETUP button PPI next chapter button gt fast forward button E stop button Volume control button 4l reverse button gt Il play and pause button Ma previous chapter button BACK button SOURCE button POWER LOR SOURCE Oe LHA2552 SAA0978 Select rear displays audio source Slide the display select switch on the remote control to the left L or right R to select each screen source individually The SOURCE button on the remote control se lects the source for front and rear screens at once 2 Remote controller and headphones battery replacement ACAUTION e An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal e When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the components SAA3081 To replace the battery 1 Open the lid as illustrated For headphones remove the screw 4 with a flat bladed screwdriver before re moving the lid Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 119 2 Replace both batteries with new ones Recommended battery Size AA 6 2 DVD remote controller Size AAA 6 2 headphones Be careful not to touch the battery termi nal Make sure that the and ends on the batteries match the markings inside the compartment 3 Close the lid securely If y
200. Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light displaying 2 in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits for the air bag systems preten sioners and all related wiring When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags and preten
201. See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS i 2 SLi r 7 8 VQ35DE engine 1 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 12 a ie 2 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 SS z 4 3 Drive belt location P 8 16 a TE lt 4 Fuse box P 8 21 Q Z l E y CA 7 N 5 Engine oil filler cap P 8 9 kag ep l Sw H H Ny i AN ive 6 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 12 anime M i l EN 7 Air cleaner P 8 18 PRN A ICI f N Xa _P ete gh Kiel Fn Gl EER 8 Fuse box P 8 21 RTO lage Eee teh 9 Fusible links P 8 22 Y On Di DALAT VIE 10 Battery P 8 14 ape nt Es 6 i S VASS 11 Engine oil dipstick P 8 9 SANG PN 12 Radiator cap P 8 7 AIS aL 13 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 13 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details CO LDI2148 0 8 Illustrated table of contents WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Anti lock Braking System ABS warn ing light Charge warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light Power steering warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air 2 bag warning light 4WD warning light 2 14 if so equipped Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light blue Malfunction Indica tor Light MIL Over
202. X Track XXXXXXXX Folder 1of4 Track 1ofi 0 40 LHA1258 For information on how to use the NISSAN con troller see How to use the NISSAN controller in this section Display album cover art When an audio source encoded with album cover art is played the album cover art can be displayed on the screen To toggle this feature on or off touch the Display Album Cover Art key When the feature is activated the amber indica tor next to the word ON will illuminate 4 88 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD DVD or USB with compressed audio files While listening to a CD or compressed audio files certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or compressed audio files are encoded the following text might be displayed Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name Some of this text might not display while playing a regular CD FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the AM FM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the AM FM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position th
203. XXXXXXX WHA0950 CD MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the following text might be able to be displayed by selecting the Text key Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name e Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name e Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name e Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur rently playing Track displays the name of the song on the CD currently playing Some of this text or modes might not display while playing a regular CD Select the Menu key with the NISSAN controller then select the Text key to display the text for the CD 4 82 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display screen FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the FM AM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the FM AM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is
204. ace any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems This is to prevent dam age to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems e Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag e Work around and on the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur tain and rollover air bag systems The SRS wiring har
205. ach tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pres sure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined w
206. ack to default by pressing the ENTER button Instruments and controls 2 23 No Key ME Low faz Low Oil Pressure 1 Detected 9 Se Washer Fluid 17 747 See Owner s Manual Ma KeyiD ZN fe In erat 1 ax Door Open 18 es 3 P8 Shift to Park 4 amp Push ignition to OFF Key 5 battery low 1 ZA Liftgate Open 13 E Low Outside l Temperature Power will turn off 1 peat li JRS Time for a 2 y driver break J19 en LI gi Tire Pressure Key Registration Complete Tire Pressure Low Add Air LISa Low Add Air af TPMS Error See Owner s Manual to save the battery 1 O _ or a EE ee 8 M Low Fuel 16 P Tum OFF hendi hts 22 ae LIC2531 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 4 Push ignition to OFF 8 Low Fuel WARNINGS AND INDICATORS 1 No Key Detected 2 Key ID Incorrect 3 Shift to Park 2 24 Instruments and controls 5 Key battery low tem Release parking brake 9 Low Washer Fluid Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys 10 Door Open 11 Liftgate Open 12 Timer Alert Time for a driver break 13 Low Outside Temperature 14 Power will turn off to save the battery 15 CVT Error See Owner s Manual 16 Reminder Turn OFF headlights 17 Low Oil Pressure 18 Key Registration Complete 19 Tire Pressure Low Add
207. acks will constantly play in sequential order 1 Folder Repeat The folder that is currently being accessed will be repeated 1 Track Repeat The track that is currently playing will be repeated 1 Disc Random The tracks on the disc that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order 1 Folder Random The tracks in the folder that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order A CD EJECT button When the amp button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off LHA2474 AUX auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the center console 1 NTSC compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks Audio devices such as some MP3 players can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden tification purposes Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input Yellow video input Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks turn off the power of the portable device With a compatible device connected to the aux iliary input jacks press the AUX button until the AUX mode appears in the display The output from the devi
208. ademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Visteon and Clarion Bluetooth SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires subscription sold separately Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit Wwww siriusxm com 2012 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedi cated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date
209. adio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not avail able in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception XM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Sat ellite Radio Inc COMPACT LHA0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Compact disc CD player models without Navigation System ACAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging e During cold weather
210. al structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself TYPES OF TIRES AWARNING e When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pres sure warning system e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
211. aler immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints and headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wiper
212. all rows They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in flated for a short time The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 sec onds if the system is operational 1 62 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not pl
213. an change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions 1 37 WRS0761 LRSO669 LRS0670 Rear facing step 2 Rear facing step 3 Rear facing step 4 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended At this time the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR follow the child restraint manufacturer s in mode child restraint mode It reverts to the structions for belt routing Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplementa
214. ane rating See fuel octane rating Odometer 2 i s ech ger ie ee ate eS Oil Capacities and recommended fuel lubrieants s sara Tome aoro a Changing engine oil aaa aaa Changing engine oilfilter Checking engine oillevel Engine oil s s scs 2a a ee hee We Engine oil and oil filter recommendation Engine oil viscosity Outside mirror control 0 Outside mirrors 2 ee ee Overheat If your vehicle overheats Owner s manual order form Owner s manual service manual order information 242 4 0228400 a8 P Parking Parking brake operation 5 18 Parking parking on hills 5 25 Phone Bluetooth hands free SYS EM 26k Rs a Ea 4 127 4 141 Power Front seat adjustment 1 4 Power door locks 00 3 6 Power outlet 2 42 2 44 Power rear windows 2 52 Power steering fluid 8 12 Power steering system 5 26 Power windows 005 2 51 Rear power windows 2 52 Power inverter switch 00 2 41 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 On pavement and off road driving precautions so ce eee ee eS 5 6 Precautions on child restraints 1 30 1 37 1 41 1 46 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 21 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEM a a pisa Bee ei aS ese aT at 1 49 Precautions when starting and drivi
215. ange Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Off will activate all doors with one click LHA1308 WHA1151 WHA1152 Adjust Clock To adjust the time select the or key for the hour until the desired number is reached Repeat the process for the minutes on the line below To accept the changes made and return to the Clocks Settings screen select the OK key Comfort amp Convenience settings Select the Comfort amp Conv key by using the NISSAN controller The comfort and conve nience option screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by highlighting the desired item using the NISSAN controller The amber indicator box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Auto Headlights Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left Auto Headlights Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 second periods Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjuste
216. ansmission and or cooling system When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is pre diluted to provide antifreeze protection to 34 F 37 C If additional freeze protec tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue concentrate following the direc tions on the container If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is used follow the coolant manufacturer s instructions to maintain minimum anti freeze protection to 34 F 37 C The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of cool ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue includ ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill cool ant Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 i Ww M y VA NOT ey ZW S LDI2086 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when t
217. anti glare feature is operating NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation LPD0469 Type A Without compass Type A and Type B The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button for inside mirrors without compass e the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn off LPD0470 Type B With compass To turn on the automatic anti glare feature again press the button for inside mirrors without compass e the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn on For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver if so equipped operation see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the In struments and controls section of this manual For information on the compass display if so equipped see Compass display in the Instru ments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 33 LPD2083 OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Move the small switch 4 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired po
218. are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only 2nd row bench seat outboard seating positions LATCH lower anchor AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instruc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH system anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Inspect the lower anchors by insert ing your fingers into the lower anchor area Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0700 LATCH lower anchor location LRS2146 LATCH label locations 2nd row bench LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at th
219. ark position From the Vehicle Settings menu select Auto Door Unlock Use the ENTER button to enable disable this func tion Answer back horn When the answer back horn is on the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key Remote Start if so equipped The remote start function can be turned on or off If the setting is OFF the vehicle cannot be started using the intelligent key From the Vehicle Set tings menu select Remote Start Use the EN TER button to enable disable Battery Saver The battery saver automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the headlight switch is in the FPQ or 2 tion 2 22 posi Instruments and controls Exit Seat Slide When the Exit seat slide is ON the driver s seat will move backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the driver s seat will move to the previous set position For more information for setting the seat position see Automatic drive positioner in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Use the EN TER button to enable disable this function Exit steering up When the exit steering up is turned ON the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit whe
220. arly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary r
221. arning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the seat belts with pretensioner system may not function properly For additional details see Supplemen tal restraint system in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible awp 4WD warning light if so equipped The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position It turns off soon after the engine is started If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink See 4WD warning light in the Starting and driving section ACAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving
222. at 24h Offset hour a Offset min Daylight Savings Time Eastern 1 6 Time Zone LHA2563 Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system Clock Format 24h When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated the clock format will change from the default 12 hour display to a 24 hour display Offset hour Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the hours Offset minute Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the minutes Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will go out 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Time Zone 8 00 Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland LHA1243 Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones de
223. at and steering column is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the shift selector is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position The seat synchronization function is auto matically disabled if the outside mirrors or steering wheel reaches its maximum adjust ment The seat synchronization function will not operate if the seat is adjusted over one of the following maximum thresholds Seat sliding 3 0 in 76 mm Seatback reclining 9 1 degrees Seat lifter rear side 0 8 in 20 mm The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display by performing the following Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to OFF Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 39 MEMO 3 40 Pre driving checks and adjustments 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons color screen without Navigation System if so equipped 000 4 4 How to use the NISSAN controller 5 4 5 How to select menus on the screen 4 6 How to use the STATUS button 45 4 6 How to use the INF
224. at the seat and seat back are locked properly Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk in seat 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2147 Outboard seats 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT Reclining To recline the seatback pull up on the latch located on the outside corner of each seatback Lean back until the desired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again pull up on the latch and pull the seatback upright until the desired angle is obtained The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park AWARNING e After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt p
225. ated e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth 2 38 Instruments and controls p amp e LIC1543 The rear seats are warmed by built in heaters The switches are located on the rear of the front center console and can be operated indepen dently of each other 1 Start the engine 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired The indicator light in the switch will illuminate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off HEATED STEERING WHEEL if so equipped Sy LIC0421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68 F 20 C Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts The indicator light will come on If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68 F 20 C the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86 F 30 C then turn off automatically Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel off manually The indi
226. ated until the screen reached the desired position When the screen is released it will remain in the current position To return to the screen to the flat position press the base of the screen in all the way until it clicks and retracts Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 115 LHA2260 Rear auxiliary input jacks The rear auxiliary input jacks are located on the rear of the center console NTSC PAL compat ible devices can be connected to the auxiliary jacks The images from the connected device can be viewed on the rear displays The rear auxiliary jacks are color coded for iden tification purposes Yellow video input White left channel audio input Red right channel audio input Before connecting a device to a jack turn off the power of the portable device To display the rear AUX screen press the pre ferred side L or R of the AUX L AUX R buttons rear input jacks on the remote control ler The connected device from the rear auxiliary in put jacks cannot be displayed on the front screen 4 116 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA3077 Headphones The headphones for this system are a wireless type and no cables are necessary The head phones can only be used in the rear seat Power ON OFF Press the power ON OFF button to turn the headphones on or off SAA3078 Volume control Turn
227. ation Practice 44 Audio 4 Help To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1333 Example 1 Placing a call to the phone number 800 662 6200 1 Pressthe amp ing wheel button located on the steer 4 160 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Au dio or Help Say Phone Voice Recognition gt Phone Yall 8 00 Kd 4 Dial Number 2 Vehicle Phonebook 4 Handset Phonebook Her _ 4 Call History 4 Intemational Call Phone To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1334 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 a Dial Number Please say the entire number or groups of numbers Manual Controls To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1335 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 4 800 4 Dial 47 Change Number Help Manual Controls Please say the next 3 digits Dial or say Change Number To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1336 4 Say Dial Number 5 Say 800 6 The system announces Please say the next three digits or dial or say change number 7 Say 662 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 161 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 47 Change Number 8
228. ature control buttons to set the desired temperature e Fan speed control Press the fan speed increase or decrease button to manually control the fan speed Press the A C button when the rear automatic air conditioning system is turned on with the rear air conditioner screen displayed to turn off the rear automatic air conditioning system Rear Heating A C off 1 Press the REAR button to display the rear air conditioner screen on the front display when the rear automatic air conditioning system is on 2 Press the AUTO button The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and AUTO will appear on the display 3 If the A C indicator light illuminates press the A C button The A C indicator light will turn off 4 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Doing so may cause the temperature to not be controlled prop erly To dehumidify the air press the A C button before turning on the heater Turning the system off Press the OFF button when the rear air condi tioner screen is displayed LHA2134 OFF button Fan speed increase button AUTO button Temperature increase A button Temperature decrease Y button Display Fan speed decrease button Rear control buttons NOORONS The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear automatic air conditioning system using the con trol switche
229. ature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Adjust the temperature display to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically e A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function 3 You can individually set driver s and front passenger s side temperature using each temperature control dial When the DUAL button or passenger s side temperature dial is turned the DUAL indicator will come on To turn off the passenger s side temperature control press the DUAL button Heating A C OFF The air conditioner does not activate When you need to heat only use this mode 1 Press the A C button A C OFF will be displayed and A C indicator will turn off 2 Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Otherwise the sys tem may not work properly Not recommended if windows fog up Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Press the OY front defroster button on The indicator light on the button will come on
230. autions Do not bend the cable excessively 1 6 in 40 mm radius minimum Do not twist the cable excessively more than 180 degrees Do not pull or drop the cable Do not hit or press the USB port or USB device with hands feet or objects Do not store objects with sharp edges in the storage area where the cable is stored Do not leave the USB device and attached devices in the vehicle com partment When not in use for ex tended periods of time store the cable and USB device in a clean dust free environment at room tempera ture and without direct sun exposure Do not use the cable for any other purposes than its intended use in the vehicle The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary This system cannot be used to format USB de vices To format a USB device use a personal computer In some states area the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regu latory reasons even when the vehicle is parked This system supports various USB memory de vices USB hard drives and iPod players Some USB devices may not be supported by this sys tem Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 e Partitioned USB devices may not play cor rectly Some characters used in other languages Chinese Japanese etc may not appear properly in the display Using English lan guage characters wi
231. automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it 6 10 Incase of emergency Nia PS we Vehicle with battery for LA Cloth eo booster WCE0054 A WARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles to bring their bat teries near each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se lector to P Park Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems lights heater air condi tioner etc Remove the vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard Connect the jumper cables in the sequence illustrated A CAUTION e Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started A CAUTION Do not keep the starter mot
232. back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK P button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will ad vance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The NISSAN controller can also be used to se ect tracks when a CD is playing 144 gt p SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind and Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or the TRACK gt fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD Repeat All 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random Repeat All 4 84 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems CD with compressed audio files Repeat All 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random Re peat All Repeat All Normal play mode All tr
233. bar to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull up on the lever and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park AWARNING e After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section LRS2142 One touch walk in function The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the vehicle by using the seatback release lever lo cated on the 2nd row seatback
234. be cancelled Switch Call Select Switch Call to answer another incoming call By selecting Hang Up you can end a call and can speak to a caller who is on hold again This function may not be useable depend ing on the model of phone To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 149 Gof Yu 8 00 Call in Progress amp 0 04 Hang up Use Handset E XXXXXXXX Mute XXXXXXXX Keypad LHA1324 Settings gt Phone Go Ml Yu 8 00 Edit Vehicle Phonebook Delete Phonebook Download Handset Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Auto Downloaded Add or edit phonebook entries LHA1319 ENDING A CALL To finish the call perform one of the following procedures Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress display e Press the f wheel button on the steering PHONE SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred settings press the SET TING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key on the display Edit Vehicle Phonebook See Vehicle Phonebook
235. bove approximately 6 mph 10 km h the screen changes from the Around View Monitor screen to the previous screen LHA2549 CAMERA AIDING SONAR parking sensor The sonar parking sensor sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper The colors of the sonar indicators and the dis tance guide lines in the front front wide rear and rear wide views indicate different distances to the object 4 46 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AWARNING The sonar parking sensor is a conve nience feature It is not a substitute for proper parking The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers Always look around and check that it is safe to move before parking Read and understand the limitations of the sonar parking sensor as contained in this section The colors of the sonar indicators and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distances to the object Inclement weather or Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash a truck s compressed air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system this may include reduced performance or a false activation This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system will not detect small ob
236. brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the effect of the parking brake is weakened or when ever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety e Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels Starting and driving 5 27 When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tir
237. c power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer See Power steering system in the Starting and driving section Instruments and controls 2 13 iA Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage a Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag 2 14 Instruments and controls and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag w
238. cally into the slot When ejecting the DVD press the EJECT button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 121 Press the AUX DVD button on the instrument panel and turn the display to the DVD mode and begin playing the DVD automatically When a DVD is loaded it will begin playing automatically The front screen will be turned on when the AUX DVD button is pressed while a DVD is being played and it will turn off automatically after a period of time To turn it on again press the AUX DVD button again Adjust front rear displays Front display To adjust the front display mode press the DISP button on the center multi function control panel Follow the instructions displayed on the screen Rear display To adjust the rear display mode press the pre ferred side L or R of the DISP button on the remote controller DVD operation keys To operate the DVD player select the preferred key displayed on the operation screen using the NISSAN controller LU PAUSE Select this key and press the ENTER button to pause the DVD To resume playing the DVD use the PLAY key To pause the DVD it is also possible to push the pause button on the keypad of the remote con troller on Select this key and press the ENTER button to start playing the DVD for example after pausing the DVD To start playing the DVD it is also possible to press the play button on the keypad of the remote control
239. can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury 7 4 Appearance and care ACAUTION e Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material e Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish e Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners MOONROOF if so equipped The moonroof is made from a suede material Clean the moonroof material as follows A CAUTION To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning e Do not
240. cator light will go off Instruments and controls 2 39 NOTE The heated steering wheel switch is equipped with a 30 minute timer After the switch has been activated for 30 minutes the system will automatically turn off If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68 F 20 C when the switch is turned on the system will not heat the steering wheel This is not a malfunction 2 40 Instruments and controls CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT SWITCH if so equipped SIC4334 The climate controlled seat warms up or cools down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air from under the surface of the seat The climate control switch is located on the center console The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows 1 Start the engine 2 Turn the control knob to the heat side or the cool side The indicator light E on the control knob will illuminate 3 Adjust the desired amount of air using the control knob The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approxi mately 60 seconds after turning the switch on or selecting the desired temperature 4 When the vehicle s interior is warmed or cooled or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the control knob to the Off center position The indicator light on the control knob goes off with the switch in the off center position To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat contact a NISSAN dealer AW
241. ce recognition systems section of this manual Mileage The unit for the mileage that displays in the ve hicle information display can be changed to miles MPG Inch km h I 100km cm Use the and the ENTER buttons to select and change the unit Tire Pressures if so equipped The unit for tire pressure that displays in the vehicle information display can be changed to psi kPa bar Kgf cm Use the and the ENTER buttons to select and change the unit Temperature The temperature that displays in the vehicle infor mation display can be changed from F Fahrenheit e C Celsius Use the ENTER button to toggle choices Welcome Effects The welcome screen display can be turned ON OFF to display when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position To enable disable the welcome screen 1 Press the button 2 Use the buttons to select Settings and press ENTER 3 Select Welcome Effects using the buttons and press ENTER to turn this func tion ON or OFF Factory Reset The settings in the vehicle information display can be reset back to the factory default To reset the vehicle information display 1 Press the button 2 Use the buttons to select Settings and press the ENTER button 3 Select Factory Reset using the t but tons and press the ENTER button 4 Select YES to return all settings b
242. ce will be played through the display when the vehicle is in the P Park position and the parking brake engaged and audio system AUX gt Menu Display Mode LHA1367 AUX settings Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con troller and press the ENTER button Choose one of the display modes by selecting the 4 keyorthe P key Normal e Wide Cinema Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system see iPod player operation without Navigation System in this sec tion For more information about the USB interface available with this system see USB interface models without Navigation System in this sec tion C259 FE 900000 VOL N KNEE DA F AM FM SAT DISC AUX e UST ONO SCAN bid I lt icy TRACK gt gt I Zi 11 10 9 F 6 5 LHA2449 1 CD eject button 6 TRACK button 2 VOL ON OFF control knob 7 SEEK CAT button 3 Station select 1 6 buttons 8 SAT button 4 _TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control 9 RPT RDM button knob Bass Treble Fade and Balance 10 SCAN button 5 DISC AUX button 11 AM FM button 4 86 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems No satellite radio reception is available when the SAT button is pressed to ac cess satellite radio stations unless op tiona
243. cedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference in cluding interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Type B if so equipped LIC2363 The Type B system can be identified by the IV on the back of the mirror Move the mirror to see if the IV is present If
244. ces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure Technical and consumer information 9 29 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by w
245. change the angle Angle Mark DVD VIDEO When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle Menu Skip DVD VIDEO DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on CM Skip DVD VIDEO Select the CM Skip key to choose the setting time for CM backward and forward operations Use the or key to choose a setting time of 15 30 or 60 seconds DRC DVD VIDEO DVD VR DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers DVD Language DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Select the DVD Language key to open the number entry screen Input the number cor responding to the preferred language and select the OK key The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one speci fied Display Adjust the image quality of the screen by selecting the preferred adjustment items Audio Choose the preferred language for the au dio Subtitle DVD VIDEO DVD VR Choose the preferred language for the sub titles Display Mode DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD DVD VR Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema mode Title List DVD VR Choose the preferred title from the list Play Mode Choo
246. channel for that category Direct Tune Tune to a channel by entering the channel number Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio sta tions on the FM band not AM band Currently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock Station specific text If the station broadcasts RDS information the text information is automatically displayed Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned
247. cing the correct direction 2 Push and hold the lock knob s 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks in place 3 Pull the head restraint up until it is removed from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad just the seat or seatback before an occupant uses the seating position 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ADJUSTABLE HEADREST AWARNING The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against in jury in certain rear end collisions Adjust the headrests properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the adjustable headrest stalks or remove the adjustable headrests Do not use the seat if the adjustable head rests have been removed If the headrest was removed reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable headrests This may in crease the risk of serious injury or death in a collision LRS2135 LRS2203 The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with adjustable headrests All of the headrests are adjustable E Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest Components 1 Ad
248. cle has remote engine start This feature allows the engine to start from out side the vehicle The following features may be affected when the remote start feature is used Vehicles with manual or automatic climate control systems will default to the last used heating or cooling mode Vehicles equipped with heated seats may have this feature come on during a remote start See Heated seats in the Instruments and controls section for more information 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view Check local regulations for any requirements Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature See Conditions the remote start will not work in this section for additional information Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter See NISSAN In telligent Key in this section for additional infor mation REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE The remote engine start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci fied operating range from the vehicle When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly
249. closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death e During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming e Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver Instruments and controls 2 63 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 NOTE Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi tion when programming HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency 1 Position the end of your hand held transmit ter 1 3 inches 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink surface keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 2 64 Instruments and controls LIC2365 LIC2366 2 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and handheld transmitter button DO NOT re lease until the HomeLink indicator light
250. cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK After cranking the engine release the accelerator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the Starting and driving 5 13 accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push button ignition switch to start the engine If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Warm up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the en gine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start 5 To stop the engine shift the shift selector to the P Park position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position 5 14 Starting and driving NOTE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no start conditions such as 1 Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running Phone char gers GPS DVD players etc 2
251. cross the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 WDI0535 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference in cluding interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the halogen headlight bulb If bulb replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer ACAUTION e Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer e Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb in
252. ctions see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide FUSES 2 6 LDI0455 LDI0457 Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 LDI2149 WDI0452 ENGINE COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself Remove the
253. ctor ALR The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten sion AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 25 WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts Tounfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods
254. d the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options 8 00 Comfort Language amp Units Settings gt Others Voice Recognition Camera Image Viewer JO 1 5 Adjust comfort amp convenience settings LHA1248 8 00 Settings gt Voice Recognition User Guide Alternate Command Mode ON Guide the usage of Voice Recognition LHA1331 Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 00 Command List User Guide Speaker Adaptation Alternate Command Mode Minimize Voice Feedback Change the mode of Voice Recognition LHA1341 Activating Alternate Command Mode 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Others key on the display 3 Select the Voice Recognition key Select the Alternate Command Mode key 5 The confirmation message is displayed on the screen Select the OK key to activate the Alternate Command Mode 6 Alternate Command Mode is activated and the setting menu is expanded to include the Alternate Command Mode options See Settings menu in this section for an expla nation of the options Displaying the command list If you are controlling the system by voice com mands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command perform the follow ing procedure for displa
255. d turn signal switch P 2 32 Control panel and Vehicle Information Display switches P 2 18 Instrument brightness control P 2 35 Illustrated table of contents Driver supplemental air bag Horn P 1 49 P 2 37 Meters gauges warning indicator lights and Vehicle Information Display P 2 3 2 10 2 18 Twin trip odometer reset switch P 2 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Windshield wiper washer switch and rear window wiper washer switch P 2 29 P 2 30 Center display P 4 16 4 4 Navigation system switches if so equipped Audio system con trols P 4 59 Center display P 4 16 4 4 Navigation system if so equipped Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 49 Glove box P 2 48 Audio system controls P 4 59 Automatic heater and air conditioning controls P 4 50 4 54 Hazard light switch P 6 2 Ignition switch P 5 10 Cruise control main set switches P 5 19 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 29 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System P 4 127 4 141 Hood release P 3 22 Vehicle dynamic control VDC OFF switch P 2 41 Tow mode switch P 2 42 Liftgate release switch if so equipped P 3 22 Heated steering wheel switch if so equipped P 2 39 Power inverter switch if so equipped P 2 41 Power liftgate main switch if so equipped P 3 26 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped
256. d automati cally according to the vehicle speed Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Lift Steering Wheel on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position the steering wheel moves to the previous position Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings 4 14 Mon
257. d before shifting from P Park to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of the P Park position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector to a driving position 3 Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in motion AWARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse D Drive or L Low position Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Fail ure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up e Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while vehicle is moving Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident ACAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by de pressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of conirol Except in an emergency do not shift to the N Neutral position while driving Coasting with the transmission in the N Neutral position may cause serious damage to the transmission
258. d by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference in clude interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert When adding air to an under inflated tire the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure Vehicle set up 1 Park the vehicle in a safe and level place 2 Apply the parking brake and place the shift selector to the P Park position 3 Place the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine Operation 1 Add air to the tire 2 After a few seconds the hazard indicators will start flashing Starting and driving 5 5 3 When the designated pressure is reached the horn beeps once and the hazard indica tors stop flashing 4 Perform the above steps for each tire If the tire is over inflated more than ap proximately 4 psi 30 kPa the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 times To correct the pressure push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure When the pressure reaches the designated pressure the horn beeps once If the ha
259. d in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer LPD2103 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 WPD0375 DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS PRECAUTION Do not
260. d restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment re moval and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0667 Forward facing step 4 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRSO668 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt W
261. d safety a cisdhanvawtseedeiediebcewndaek veesd 1 28 Infants cescscenridee sete e etd heele weed fae 1 29 Small children 0 0 c cee eee eee eee 1 29 Largerchildren vic ciecce seine yates caceametee an Child restraints osp 2s02 0 23000 beence Cee werewte Precautions on child restraints 00 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System 6 0c c eee eee eee ees Rear facing child restraint installation using LATCH iter cunatdes Seaton a eatemeeunsuaan na ena aay Rear facing child restraint installation using ihe seat pels serorari aided whl nate EE Forward facing child restraint installation using LATCH ceracsaceniieo ornegi n apenn iik Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat beltS 0 00 e eee eee esse Installing top tether strap 2nd row bench seat cece eee eee eee eee Installing top tether strap 3rd row bench seat cece eee eee eee eee Booster seals Si coeiirraie dace ledans cnet andredtene tin Supplemental restraint system 05 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSOM a i cctd i anera anen A DENNE E ANEA Supplemental air bag warning labels Supplemental air bag warning light SEATS ARS1152 AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you
262. d voice recognition systems 4 143 Settings gt Bluetooth o MYu 8 00 Settings gt Bluetooth o MYu 8 00 8 00 Bluetooth g O The system is searching for your phone Using your handset look d Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to E for a Bluetooth device called MY use with the handsfree phone system Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices q For audio devices please select No CAR When requested by the i handset enter the PIN 1234 Edit Bluetooth Info G Exiting screen cancels search Replace Connected Phone R xes J No Cancel 16 LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1318 2 Select the Connect Bluetooth key 3 A popup box will appear on the screen 4 When a PIN code appears on the screen prompting you to confirm that the connec operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to tion is for the phone system Select the Yes enter the PIN code key The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular phones When the connecting is complete the screen will return to the Bluetooth settings screen 4 144 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems
263. d warnings if so equipped Tire Pressure information if so equipped 2 18 Instruments and controls HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display can be changed using the buttons and ENTER located on the steering wheel 1 select enter the Vehicle informa tion menu items or to change from one dis play screen to the next i e trip TPMS Fuel economy Sie ee navigate through the items in ve hicle information ENTER change or select an item in the vehicle information display 3 go back to the previous menu TheENTERand buttons also control audio and control panel functions For additional infor mation see Steering wheel switch for audio control in Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section STARTUP DISPLAY When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC position the screens that display in the vehicle information include e Active system status if so equipped Trip computer Tire pressure information if so equipped Fuel economy Warnings Warnings will only display if there are any pres ent for more information on warnings and indica tors see Vehicle information display warnings and indicators in this section To control what items display in the vehicle infor mation display see Main menu selection in this section SETTINGS The setting mode allows you to change the infor mati
264. de the usage of Voice Recognition LHA1331 Voice recognition settings The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition system are described 1 Select Voice Recognition 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes voice commands will not be ac cepted Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition initialization is completed BEFORE STARTING To get the best recognition performance from Voice Recognition observe the following The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noise and vi bration sounds etc which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command e Speak in a natural conversational voice with out pausing between words lf the air conditioner is set to Auto the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily 4 156 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA2479 GIVING VOICE COMMANDS 1 Pressthe amp ing
265. der the jack to give it firm support A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded e Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower AWARNING e Do not use your engi
266. dicate a potential emission control malfunction The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the O light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection maintenance test See Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Tech nical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The J light should turn off after a few driving trips If the C light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator L
267. displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the display turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automati cally turn off until that operation is finished Oth erwise the screen turns off automatically after 5 seconds To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key or e Press the 2 OFF button and the mes sage resuming display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Settings gt Color Theme 8 00 Black LHA1240 Color theme Select the Display key then select the Color Theme key The Color Theme select screen will appear Select the key for the desired color The appear ance of the background arrows and bars will change for all screens accordingly You can choose a black blue or red color theme Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 Settings gt Clock 8 00 On screen Clock l Clock Form
268. dition DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off road use However avoid driving in deep wa ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use unlike a conventional off road ve hicle Remember that two wheel drive models are less capable than four wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud or the like Please observe the following precautions AWARNING e Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain Do not drive across steep slopes In stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes Off road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward Many hills are too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you may stall If you drive down them you may not be able to control your speed If you drive across them you may roll over Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill At the top there could be a drop off or other hazard that could cause an accident If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill never at tempt to turn around Your vehicle could tip or
269. dition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition e Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Technical and consumer information 9 25 Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving 9 26 Technical and consumer information Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadver tently becoming unlatched Av
270. dren unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate LPD2108 OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFTGATE if so equipped The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors including the liftgate simultane ously To open the liftgate pull up on the handle To close lower and push the liftgate down se curely Liftgate switch LPD2063 LPD0249 Instrument panel switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 LPD2109 Liftgate opener switch OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE if so equipped AWARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle be fore closing the liftgate e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments NOTE To open close or reverse the power lift gate the shift selector must be in P Park Also the power liftgate will not operate if battery voltage is low Power Open The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in approximately 5 8 seconds The power open feature can b
271. drive off indica tor light if so equipped Security indicator light Slip indicator light Tow mode ON indi cator light if so equipped Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light 4WD AUTO indica tor light if so equipped 4WD LOCK indica tor light if so equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 9 MEMO 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats eeano anu EEEE iso einer eadenraae eerie 1 2 Front manual seat adjustment if so equipped 6 cece eee eee eee eee 1 2 Front power seat adjustment if so equipped 2 cece cece eee eee eee 1 4 2nd row bench seat adjustment 00 1 6 3rd row bench seat adjustment 0 1 8 Head restraints 1st row only n n anaana 1 9 Head restraints 2nd row 0 cc eee eee eee 1 12 Adjustable headrest 000ccceee eee 1 15 Head restraints 8rd row cece cece ees 1 17 Flexible Seating wie prei r gece usiden turatti 1 19 Seat pelissa rrenari a eima deers Pace wie EE ri 1 21 Precautions on seat belt usage 00 1 21 Pregnant WOMEN iccvee cae cee eee ee rea 1 24 Injured PersONnSiiisesees ess tviee ooh ee atiated okt 1 24 Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 24 Seat belt extenders 2 cece eee eee 1 27 Seat belt maintenance 0 000 1 28 Chil
272. driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within one minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Lift Steering Wheel on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the steering wheel moves to the previous position 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort systems to their default settings Settings gt Language amp Units 8 00 Select Language English Select Units US LHA1250 Settings gt Select Language 8
273. ds Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting 9 Winter Warm Up Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start up to effec tively circulate the engine oil before driv ing Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling 10 Keeping your Vehicle Cool Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible When entering a hot vehicle opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster resulting in reduced demand on your A C system Starting and driving 5 21 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended scheduled main tenance Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the wheels in correct alignment Im proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy e Use the recommended viscosity engine oil See Engine oil and oil filter recommenda tions in Technical and consumer informa tion later in this manual 5 22 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT 4WD if so equipped 4x4 LIC2399 4X4 SYSTEM OPERATION AWD shift switch The Four Wheel Drive 4WD system is used to select the 2WD Two Wheel
274. dshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector to P Park Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts lt is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle e Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition switch is in the OFF posi tion and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is suppo
275. e Finding a Street Address Tutorial for Finding a Street Address e Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available Voice Recognition settings e Adapting the System to Your Voice Tutorial for adapting the system to your voice USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes the display will show the mes sage System not ready or a beep sounds Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 169 Before starting 3 i iti k SBack To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Voice Recognition 8 00 Recognition observe the following aj Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as Prone possible Close the windows to eliminate the a7 Navigation j surrounding noises traffic noises vibration ay Information Practice sounds etc which may prevent the system F Audio j from recognizing the voice commands cor a Heip rectly Alternate Command Mode ON When the climate control is in t
276. e properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light AF located in the meter and gauges area of the instrument panel will blink Have the sys tem checked by a NISSAN dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING e Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate 1 60 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you ma
277. e radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is playing when the AM FM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automati cally change from stereo to monaural reception SAT band select Pressing the SAT button will change the band as follows XM1 XM2 XM3 XM1 satellite if so equipped When the SAT button is pressed while the igni tion switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the SAT button is pressed the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not avail able in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the SAT button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left SEEK CAT and TRACK lt lt gt t
278. e BACK button on the control panel Slideshow order Select the Random key to display the images in a random order during a slideshow Select the Order List key to display the images in the order in which they are stored on the storage device Select the Back key or press the BACK button on the control panel to return to the slideshow screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the shift selector is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle The system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking AWARNING e The RearView Monitor is a convenience but itis not a substitute to check behind the vehicle when backing up The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers e Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Objects in the rearview will appear visu ally opposite than when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up e Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation e Do not put anything on the rear view camera The rear view camera is in stalled above the license plate
279. e Recognition TALK switch With voice recognition you can use voice commands to control navigation audio phone and other functions To start the voice recognition system push the TALK switch on the steering wheel Then say a command after the tone LHA1329 Getting started Before using the Voice Recognition system for the first time you can confirm how to use com mands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide 1 Select the Getting Started key 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller or touching the page down key 4 154 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec ognition system If you choose Finding a Street Address Using the Address Book or Placing Calls you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using Voice Recognition 8 00 Information gt User Guide This test will analyze your speech The system will prompt you to say a phone number After you say the number the system will provide feedback to Improve voice recongnition When you are ready push the TALK switch When you are ready push the Talk switch LHA1327 8 00 Information gt User Guide Digits were not recognized correctly Please check analysis of your speech for possible improvements Soft Good Loud 836 623
280. e activated by the switch on the keyfob the instrument panel switch and the lift gate request switch The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power open se quence has been started The liftgate can be opened by the instrument panel switch liftgate request switch and the keyfob even if the vehicle is locked The liftgate will individually unlock and open Once the liftgate is closed its lock will align to the vehicle s lock or unlock status The keyfob button must be held for 0 5 sec ond before the liftgate opens The liftgate must be unlocked to open it with the liftgate opener switch A warning chime will sound if the shift selector is moved out of P Park during a power open operation Power Close The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully open position to the secondary position When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi tion the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position Power close takes approximately 7 10 seconds The power close feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob the instrument panel and the liftgate opener switch The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power close se quence has been started If the liftgate opener switch is activated while the cinching motor is engaged the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch The keyfob button must be held for 0 5 sec ond before
281. e an accident e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 113 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire and loading information label affixed to the driver side center pillar 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle 6 Close the liftgate AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop e The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual e When re installing the spare tire under the vehicle after use be sure to secure it with the tire stem facing down toward the ground If the spare tire is improp
282. e and allow the transmission to return to normal op eration or have it repaired if necessary 5 18 Starting and driving PARKING BRAKE AWARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle e Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident AS LSD0158 To engage Firmly depress the parking brake To release 1 Firmly apply the foot brake 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion 3 Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out CRUISE CONTROL SSD0941 Ons 4 ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch CANCEL switch ON OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL If the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display then blinks to warn the driver see Vehicle infor mation display in the Instruments and con trols section f the SET indicator light blinks push the cruise control ON OFF switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The SET indicator light may blink
283. e engine with the 4WD mode switch in any mode in the follow ing cases when the vehicle is placed on a fre eroller or jacking up the vehicle with the front tires raised and the rear tires on the ground when towing the vehicle with the rear tires raised from the ground e Operate the 4WD mode switch only when driving straight Do not operate the 4WD mode switch when making a turn or backing up e Do not operate the 4WD mode switch with the front wheel spinning e Engine idling speed is high while warm ing up the engine Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery sur faces with the 4WD mode switch set in the AUTO mode 5 24 Starting and driving 4WD warning light ere Illuminates or Warning light blinks when There is a mal function in the 4 wheel drive system The power train oil temperature is abnormally high The difference in wheel rota tion is large The 4WD warning light located in the instrument panel illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It turns off soon after the engine is started If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is in the ON position the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink High temperature power train oil due to continu ous operation of the vehicle to free a stuck vehicle makes the warning light blink rapidly about twice per second The driving mode may change to the
284. e environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual ANISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL volume ON OFF power knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception
285. e measured reference height when loaded the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 907 kg Class II hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3 500 Ib 1 587 kg Class Ill hitch Class Ill trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always us
286. e memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the button The VA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded 4 138 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 10 The system will announce that voice adap tation has been completed and the system is ready The VA mode will stop if e The button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in VA mode The vehicle begins moving during VA mode The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the VA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phonebook transfer entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number incoming transfer entry eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phonebook delete entry next entry dial star two one seven oh yes no select missed dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on outgoing call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight cancel call back number call star two zero nine f
287. e rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors LRS0661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 Top tether anchor AWARNING Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged 2nd row bench seat 1 Top tether strap 2 Anchor point 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts
288. e storage device can be played through the vehicle s audio system and center display screen When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory the mode select screen is dis played Use the touchscreen or the NISSAN con troller to select the preferred type of file When there is only type of file in the USB memory that audio or movie operation screen is displayed and starts to play When you play a file with limited playing time the confirmation screen will be displayed before starting to play the file Confirm the playing time and select yes to start playing Audio file operation DISC AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the DISC AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing push the ON OFF VOL control knob to restart the USB memory PP pp SEEK CAT and TRACK Reverse or Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT M4 rewind button or TRACK PPI fast forward button for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an in creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding 4 100 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition syst
289. e suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer retailer Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7 pin trailer harness connector If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4 pin connector an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retaile
290. e the risk the procedures must be followed precisely ACAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully APD1005 If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen lt S L If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle 6 5 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action t 4 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a tr
291. e the antenna turn the antenna rod counterclockwise To install the antenna rod turn the antenna rod clockwise and hand tighten A CAUTION Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation DUAL HEAD RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM if so equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the Dual Head Restraint DVD System you can enjoy playing video files via a DVD CD or USB memory that provides images and sound both from the front and rear display screens You can also enjoy compatible auxiliary devices such as video games camcorders or portable video players through the auxiliary jacks The front and right left rear displays can show different sources individually The maximum of three audio sources such as an iPod DVD and auxiliary device can be enjoyed at the same time AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the Dual Head Restraint DVD System while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the im ages on the front center display screen using the DVD player 4 114 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems ACAUTION e Do not attempt to use the system in extremely high or low temperature con dition below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C To avoid draining the vehicle battery do not operate the system for more than 15
292. e will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section ee WRS0699 Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and there fore must not be used in the front seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 1 42 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Hea
293. eal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN de
294. ean the camera This will cause discoloration To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with a di luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth e Do not damage the camera as the moni tor screen may be adversely affected The screen displayed on the Around View Monitor will automatically return to the pre vious screen three minutes after the CAM ERA button has been pressed with the shift selector in a position other than the R Re verse position When the view is switched the display im ages on the screen may be displayed in some delay When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not display objects clearly This is not a malfunction When strong light directly shines on the camera objects may not be displayed clearly This is not a malfunction 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects This is not a malfunction Objects on the Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment This is not a malfunction There may be differences in sharpness be tween each camera view of the bird eye view If dirt rain or snow accumulates on the cam era the Around View Monitor may not dis play objects clearly Clean the camera Do n
295. eat or seat back before an occupant uses the seating position 4 LRS2075 Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction Push the head restraint down until it locks in place FLEXIBLE SEATING AWARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position In a collision people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident Always replace and adjust them prop erly if they have been removed for any reason e If the head restraints are removed for any reason they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured Passengers may be injured in an acci dent or
296. ect button 5 VOL ON OFF control knob Station and CD select 1 6 buttons LOAD CD button 6 gt 9 SEEK CAT button 10 DISC button 11 RPT RDM button 12 SCAN button 13 AM FM button 14 DISP CLOCK button FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radio or CD that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Fade Balance and Beep Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Fade Balance Beep ON OFF Bass To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears on the display Turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speak ers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers To change the Beep to ON or OFF turn the TUNE FOLDER knob le
297. ed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Bal ance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears If the con
298. educe the risk of injury in colli sions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt OFF ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally leave the road surface maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a
299. ee eee ee 2 50 WINdOWS sssini e epot ane wae ain eae ann 2 51 Power WindowS suvise viseiis beet oka daa eee 2 51 Moonroof if so equipped 6 cece e eee eee 2 53 Automatic moonroof ccc eee eee eee 2 53 Panoramic sunshade if so equipped 2 55 teror NIG ses puse beet drier a at teat wanton 2 57 Console light if so equipped 068 2 57 Personal lights i220 iccteceaued tage ween dared ened 2 58 Map lighis esi serernry eeur eone itens aeelia enka 2 58 Cargo light 625 ciiveecn sa adendiin dant acadentnhe S ESE gestae 2 58 HomeLink universal transceiver Type A if so equipped 6 ieee onenig isu 2 59 Programming HomeLink 0000 008 2 60 Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUSTOMIONS eikean nine E Wherwedcanidana tetrad 2 61 Operating the HomeLink universal WANSCOIVE f sirsa priera dene ch ta eiet eee 2 61 Programming trouble diagnosis 2 61 Clearing the programmed information 2 62 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 62 If your vehicle is stolen 0 0 0 c cece eee 2 62 HomeLink universal transceiver Type B if so equipped 0 eee eee 2 63 Programming HomeLink 0000008 2 64 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers 00 eee 2 65 Operating the HomeLink universal TANSCEIVEF oc i hscde2 eh ngtreulnnge nE URET E neds 2 65 Programming trouble diagnosis
300. eed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress WDI0258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section of this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 113 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0259 1 2 Tire wear and damage Wear indicator Location mark AWARNING e Tir
301. el is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro vides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure For more information see TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert in the Starting and driving section Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING e Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident e The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity Overloading your ve hicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable handling character istics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading be yond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other ve hicle
302. em and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is nota cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load API certification mark API service symbol LT12024 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an ene
303. emental restraint system 1 45 BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not LRS0455 LRS0453 behind the child or under the child s arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt 1 46 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0464 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat T is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child
304. emove the head resiraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2135 The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints The second row head restraints are removable and adjustable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint m Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest tig oe 2 LRS2079 WRS0134 LRS0888 Components Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up 1 Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level 2 Lock knob with the center of the seat occupant s ears 3 Stalks Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 f t l L a LRS0889 LRS2080 LRS2081 To lower push and hold the lock knob and push Removal Install the head restraint down Use the following procedure to remove the head 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes restraints in the seat Make sure the head restraint is 1 Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary fa
305. ems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver is programmed retain the original transmitter for future programming proce dures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section Instruments and controls 2 59 2 60 AWARNING e Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink
306. ems When the button is released the audio file re turns to normal play speed 144 gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the SEEK CAT button M4 while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M4 several times to skip backward several tracks Press the TRACK button I while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the TRACK button P several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played Folder selection To change to another folder in the USB memory turn the TUNE FOLDER knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen RPT RDM button When the RPT RDM button is pressed while the USB memory is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows Normal 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Random 1 Folder Random Normal USB gt Menu 8 00 Folder List Track List Play Mode LHA1294 Menu There are some options available during play back Select one of the following that are dis played on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item Movie Playback Switch to the movie playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains movie files The shift selector must be i
307. ems to the driver s pre ferred settings Lock the doors with the Intelligent Key Each Intelligent Key may be set with the driver s individual preferences When a new In telligent Key is used Connection with the key has been done will be displayed on the screen and the memorized settings are available To engage the memorized settings perform the following 1 Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to the memorized settings 2 Unlock the doors by pushing the driver s door handle request switch or the UNLOCK amp button on the Intelligent Key 3 Place the ignition switch in the ON posi tion The settings linked to the Intelligent Key will start For further instructions on using the Climate con trol system see Heater and air conditioner au tomatic in Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems For further instructions on using the Navigation System see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For further instructions on using the Audio sys tem see Audio system in Monitor climate au dio phone and voice recognition systems SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the adjusting switch for the driver s se
308. en system or with the vehicle seat belt See Child restraints later in this section for more information NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg should remain in a rear facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward facing child re straint with a harness Refer to the manufactur er s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that c
309. ent image angle can be switched to another one Select the Angle key and press the ENTER button When the side or side is selected the angle will change Angle Mark DVD VIDEO When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle Menu Skip DVD VIDEO DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on CM Skip DVD VIDEO The amount of seconds for CM Skip can be set to 15 30 or 60 seconds DRC DVD VIDEO DRC Dynamic Range Compression allows tun ing of the dynamic range of sound recorded in the Dolby Digital format DVD Language DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Select the DVD Language key and press the ENTER button to open the number entry screen Input the number corresponding to the preferred language and select the OK key with the NISSAN controller Then press the ENTER but ton The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one selected Display Adjust the image quality of the screen select the preferred adjustment items and press the ENTER button Audio Choose the preferred language using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button Subtitle DVD VIDEO Choose the preferred language using the NISSAN controller and press the E
310. ents 3 17 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected The Shift to Park warning appears on the Move the shift selector to the P Park When stopping the engine display and the inside warning chime position sounds continuously When shifting the shift selector to the P The Push ignition to OFF warning appears The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF Park position in the display position position The Door Open warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously The shift selector is not in the P Park position When opening the driver s door to get out of the vehicle The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF position position The No Key Detected warning appears on the display the outside chime sounds 3 The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF times and the inside warning chime sounds position position for approximately 3 seconds The Shift to Park warning appears on the The ignition switch is in the ACC position Move the shift selector to the P Park posi display and the outside chime sounds and the shift selector is not in the P Park tion and place the ignition switch in the continuously position
311. er intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system e This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation It is limited to personal use etc as long as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued e Modifying or disassembling is prohib ited Dolby digital is manufactured under li cense from Dolby Laboratories Inc are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Inc e DTS and DTS Digital Surround Z are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc USB Universal Serial Bus memory if so equipped AWARNING Do not connect or disconnect the USB device while driving Doing so can be a distraction If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci dent or serious injury ACAUTION Do not force the USB device into the USB port Inserting the USB device tilted or up side down into the port may damage the USB device and the port Make sure that the USB device is con nected correctly into the USB port Do not grab the USB port cover if so equipped when pulling the USB device out of the port This could damage the port and the cover Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally Pulling the cable may break the wire USB device or the port To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device note the fol lowing prec
312. er switch 0 0008 6 2 Flatts cnscsacebjenevewendvas oted amends veda eae 6 3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 3 Changing a flat tire JUMP StAtING sias ssa ners ge rnoet aes ennen pe EIER 6 9 PUSH StaMINnGsevs ec ccecentewnas sr nsnoe arka cena 6 11 If your vehicle overheatS 0 cece eee eee 6 11 Towing your vehiCle c 22cc kcerciee nee dae eer bean 6 12 Towing recommended by NISSAN 6 13 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle 6 14 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1 5 seconds or Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds 6 2 Incase of emergency HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH r LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING e If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road e Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any posit
313. er the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the window and ob scure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the window with the de froster before you wash the window A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds e Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty e Do not fill the window washer reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may perma nently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir Do not use the window washer reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by
314. ers etc 2 Vehicle is not driven regularly and or only driven short distances In these cases the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself AWARNING Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear Suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry e Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of children Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level WDI10224 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case LDI0302 Chec
315. es in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles 5 28 Starting and driving AWARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates
316. es and the width of the predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES AWARNING e Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly e If the tires are replaced with different sized tires the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly e On a snow covered or slippery road there may be a difference between the predictive course line and the actual course line The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a refer ence only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual dis tance between the vehicle and dis played objects When backing up the vehicle up a hill objects viewed in the monitor are fur ther than they appear When backing up the vehicle down a hill objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they ap pear Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects LHA1197 1 Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle 2 The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen when the shift lever is moved to the R Reverse position Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 LHA1198 3 Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel
317. es on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be installed on 235 55R20 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on 235 55R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should install 235 65R18 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac turer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully load ing your vehicle when using tire chains In addi tion drive at a reduced sp
318. es should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING e The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system ground clear ance body to tire
319. est that NISSAN con duct a recall campaign However Trans port Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or NISSAN You may contact Transport Canada s De fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1 800 333 0510 You may also report safety defects online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans port Canada s Road Safety Information Centre at 1 800 333 0371 or online at www tc gc ca roadsafety English speak ers or www tc gc ca securiteroutiere French speakers To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1 800 387 0122 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST AWARNING A vehicle equipped with Four Wheel Drive 4WD should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer such as the dyna mometers used by some states for emis sions testing or similar equipment Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may re sult in transmission damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could re sult in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for
320. etreated GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film ACAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels ACAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with
321. euled eo beta eas 2S 8 16 Drive positioner Automatic 3 35 Driving Cold weather driving 5 32 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 4 5 14 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E Economy fulell 4 cede a bare as 5 22 Emission control information label 9 10 Emission control system warranty 9 30 Engine Before starting the engine 5 13 Blockheater 05 5 33 Capacities and recommended fuel lubticantS 42 4 826064404 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Changing engine oil 8 10 Changing engine oilfilter 8 11 Checking engine coolant level 8 8 Checking engine oil level 8 9 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine cooling system 8 7 Engine Oil si escent aot a pe eae 8 9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil viscosity 0 9 5 Engine serialnumber 9 10 Engine specifications 9 7 Starting the engine 5 13 Enter button sens ca uere oe ded 4 4 4 16 Event data recorders 9 32 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Extended storage switch 8 24 Eyeglasscase 000004 2 45 F Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Flatts eei ace oe ae eed EAE a 6 3 Floor mat positioningaid 7 5 F
322. ey battery discharge indicator touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi cator appears replace the battery as soon as possible See Battery Replacement in the Maintenance and do it yourself sec tion NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedure 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and windshield washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least when ever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect
323. fety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly e Do not allow children to play with the seat belts Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR mode seat belts If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child s neck with the ALR mode acti vated the child can be seri
324. flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indi cates successful programming NOTE Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the Programing HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers section 3 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e if the indicator light _ is solid continuous programming is complete and your device should acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released Ifthe indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a solid continuous light continue with Steps 4 6 for a rolling code device A second person may make the following steps easier Use a ladder or other device Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps 4 At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or smart button the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit If there is difficulty locating the button reference the garage door opener s manual 5 Press and release the learn or smart but ton 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink button for two seconds and release Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3
325. following three methods Push the CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out e Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out Starting and driving 5 19 Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle information display go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the vehicle information display goes out if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you move the shift selector to N Neutral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h 5 20 Starting and driving To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed e
326. ft and the 2 indicator lights may illuminate If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated both the fR and 2 indicator lights may illuminate 5 30 Starting and driving When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate prop erly and the indicator may flash or both the ft and indicator lights may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the R indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate This is not a mal function Restart the engine after driv ing onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the ft indicator may flash or both the f and 2 indicator lights may illuminate The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road RISE UP AND BUILD UP The system gradually adjusts braking power dur ing normal braking to help provide an enhanced brake feel BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION During braking while driving through turns the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn A WARNING e The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer
327. ft or right This will enable or disable the beep sound heard during menu selection Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Otherwise the radio or CD display will automati cally reappear after about five seconds Clock set The clock displays the time when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Adjusting the time 1 Push and hold the DISP CLOCK button for more than 2 seconds until the display shows Hour Adjust 2 Turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust the hour 3 Press the DISP CLOCK button again the display will show Minute Adjust 4 Turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to adjust the minutes 5 Press the DISP CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode Press the DISP CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display If no action is taken the display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds If the power supply is disconnected the clock will not indicate the correct time Readjust the time CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP CLOCK button The DISP CLOCK button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Track number and Track time Album title Song title 4 76 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Track number displays the track number se lected on the disc
328. ft selector is moved to R Reverse For more information regarding this feature refer to Automatic drive positioner in this section Heated mirrors if so equipped Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has three features Memory storage function Entry exit function Seat synchronization function AE LPD2113 MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver s seat steering col umn and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory system 1 Set the Continuously Variable Transmission CVT shift selector to the P Park position 2 Place the ignition in the ON position 3 Adjust the driver s seat steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch For additional information see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 35 supplemental restraint system section and Tilt Telescopic Steering and Outside mir rors in this section During this step do not place the ignition switch in any position other than ON
329. fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage e The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline e If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 E 15 fuel contains more than 10 oxy genate E 15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and sys tems of the vehicle and should not be used Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new ve hicle limited warranty Technical and consumer information 9 3 e If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficul
330. g capacity TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package The trailer tow package in cludes a receiver type frame mounted hitch This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver type frame mounted hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks Technical and consumer information 9 21 AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size pri
331. g doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildr
332. g light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle If a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modification not expressly ap prove
333. g system based computer are not supported UDF Bridge UDF 1 02 ISO9660 UDF 1 5 UDF 2 0 VDF 1 5 VDF 2 0 packet writing is not supported USB memory FAT16 FAT32 MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 6 Supported file systems B kHz 48 Kee 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 WMA 2 Version WMA7 WMA8 WMA9 Supported 32 KHz 48 KHz versions 1 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 AAC 8 kHz 96 kHz 16 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 WMA tag WMA only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Tag information Song title and artist name Text character number limitation 128 characters Digplayable character codes a 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 UNI play CODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 07 SHIFT JIS 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 Troubleshooting guide Symptoms Cause and Countermeasure Check if the CD DVD USB device was inserted correctly Check if the CD DVD is scratched or dirty Check if there is conden
334. ger than 0 5 seconds to open the rear liftgate e Press the CJ button again for longer than 0 5 seconds to close the rear liftgate When the button is pressed during the open or close process the liftgate will reverse Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting See Automatic drive positioner in this section WPD0415 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 21 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time The panic alarm stops when lt has run for a period of time or e Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key The request switch on the driver or passen ger door has been pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0362 Answer back horn feature If desired the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key When de activated and the LOCK button is pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and when the UNLOCK button is pushed nei ther the hazard indicator nor the horn operates NOTE If you change t
335. gh pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle NISSAN Intelligent Key door buzzer The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors When the buzzer sounds be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Instruments and controls 2 17 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY LIC2205 ny LIC2245 The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer It displays such items as Vehicle settings Trip computer information Cruise control system information NISSAN Intelligent Key operation informa tion Indicators an
336. ghter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Display off Select the Display ON key The amber indicator next to Display ON turns off and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after 5 seconds 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button select the Dis play key and then select the Display ON key Then set the screen to on by pressing the ENTER button or e Hold the 2 OFF button for approxi mately 2 seconds and the message resum ing display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no am ber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button E Settings gt Switch Beeps Switch Beeps SHON oc LO SCC eins t
337. ghts allows you to reduce your number of stops Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency 3 Use Air Conditioning A C at Higher Vehicle Speeds Below 40 MPH 64 km h it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load Above 40 MPH 64 km h it is more efficient to use A C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A C is on reduces cooling load 4 Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis tances Observing the speed limit and not ex ceeding 60 MPH 97 km h where le gally allowed can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag Maintaining a safe following distance be hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking e Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced brak ing and smooth acceleration changes Select a gear range suitable to road con ditions Use Cruise Control Using cruise control during highway driv ing helps maintain a steady speed e Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains 6 Plan for the Shortest Route Utilize a map or navigation system to de termine the best route to save time 7 Avoid Idling Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30 60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roa
338. gnition press and release the button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them If a command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice If you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session Whenever the VR ses sion is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press the volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering wheel 4 130 Monitor climate audio pho
339. greater file compression than the MP8 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession e ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag infor mation is displayed on the Artist song title line on the display Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks and trade marks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 FJ FOLDER O MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folder
340. h fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 mi 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the Break in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fol low these recommendations for the future reli ability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing March 2013 03 Publication No OM3E OR52U2 Printed in U S A R52 D
341. haust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire A CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants e Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer e Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst Do not race the engine while warming it up e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS E
342. have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call 4 134 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Speak Digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details Special Number For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Number When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call Back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands e Help The system announces the avail able commands Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and re
343. he button again to turn the display on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped 10 brightness control button 11 VOICE button 12 SETTING button P 4 23 13 MAP button 14 5 BACK previous button P 4 17 D 15 ZOOM IN button OFF Samal For Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For information on the CAMERA button see oat AroundView Monitor in this section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 When using this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the 15 14 13 12 11 10 engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control LHA2446 1 ZOOM OUT button 6 STATUS button P 4 20 panel 2 GAMERA eee 7 INFO button P 4 20 Example Words marked in quotes refer to a 3 DEST button 8 brightness control button key shown only on the display These keys can be p selected by touching the screen or using the 4 ROUTE button 9 1D OFF brightness control button P NISSAN controller 5 NISSAN controller P 4 17 4 30 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA2496 HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN cont
344. he AUTO To exit hold the TALK switch mode the fan speed decreases automati cally for easy recognition Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a LHA2479 LHA1345 command Giving voice commands 2 A list of commands appears on the screen Speak in a natural voice without pausing p drel or d and the system announces Please say a between words 1 Press and release the utton locate command from the displayed list or say Help on the steering wheel to show all commands 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screenchangesfrom to amp speak a command 4 Once a command is recognized the system will announce the recognized command and perform the requested action If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice after the tone 4 170 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon IS If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the button on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the button The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on t
345. he Address Book the system Finding a Street Address Getting Started Let s Practice Placing Calls Displaying user guide Help on Speaking If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it you can display the User Guide for confirmation j LHA1326 You can confirm how to use voice commands by 7 accessing a simplified User Guide which con 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument tains basic instructions and tutorials for several panel voice commands 2 Select the Others key 3 Select the Voice Recognition key NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing the amp button and saying Help 4 Select the User Guide key 5 Select an item Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 153 Available items Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Let s Practice Initiates a practice session that demon strates how to improve voice recognition by the system Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Tutorial for entering a destination by street address Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system 8 00 Information gt User Guide Using Voic
346. he ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Track title line on the display Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 J FOLDER IO COMPRESSED AUDIO FILES WHA1374 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD DVD or USB device with compressed audio files is as illus trated The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display f there is a file in the top level of the disc USB Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software so the files might not play in the desired order 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW DVDR DL USB 2 0 CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW DVDER DL ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet 1SO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista operatin
347. he answer back horn and light flash feature with the Intelligent Key the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position The vehicle information dis play screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode See Answer back horn in the Instruments and controls section To deactivate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the Troubleshooting guide in this section and Vehicle information display in the Instru ments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustm
348. he conditions outlined in this sec tion The light 2 is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor weight sensor It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF ho
349. he engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself coolant or the use of non distilled water will re duce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur ized tank When installing the cap tighten it until a clicking sound is heard If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT ANISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING e To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot e Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator
350. he following Towing Load Specification Chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification Chart 9 18 Technical and consumer information LT12041 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling braking and performance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overhea
351. he front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof AWARNING in an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof LIC2228 PANORAMIC SUNSHADE if so equipped The panoramic sunshade operates when the ig nition switch is in the ON position The sunshade switch is located near the roof console When opening or closing the sunshade the switch need not be held To open the sunshade To fully open the sunshade push the switch toward the open position To close the
352. he parking brake engaged and audio system F gt AUX AUX gt Menu 8 00 sack Display Mode Volume Setting Display WHA1393 LHA1394 AUX settings For more information about the Bluetooth Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con troller The display mode can be set to Normal Wide or Cinema The volume setting can be set to Low Medium or High Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system see iPod player operation with Navigation System in this section For more information about the USB interface available with this system see USB interface models with Navigation System in this section 4 94 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems streaming audio feature available with this sys tem see Bluetooth streaming audio in this section DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD PLAYER OPERATION models with Navigation System Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie is played To view movies on the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD s
353. he player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA if so equipped CD CD DVD combination player models with Navigation System e Do not force a disc into the CD DVD insert slot This could damage the CD DVD player During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD DVD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compart ment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO or DVD Video logo on the disc or packaging Do not expose the CD DVD to direct sunlight CDs DVDs that are of poor quality dirty scratched covered with finger prints or that have pinholes may not work properly The following CDs DVDs are not guar anteed to play e Copy control compact discs CCCD e Recordable compact discs CD R e Rewritable compact discs CD RW J Recordable compact discs DVDER DVD R DL e Rewritable compact discs DVD RW DVD RW DL Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 e Do not use the following CDs DVDs as they may cause the CD DVD player to malfunction e 3 1 in 8 cm discs e CDs DVDs that are not round e
354. he seat may not be adjusted for the driving position Note that the function is set to disabled as the factory default setting The seat synchronization function operates under the following conditions The ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector is in the P Park position If the outside mirrors or the steering wheel reaches its maximum adjustment the function is automatically disabled Restart the function by selecting a previously stored seat memory posi tion using the memory switches 1 or 2 An Intelligent Key that was previously linked to the stored seat memory can also be used to restart the function If a seat position was not previously stored in the seat memory restart the function by adjusting the steering wheel and outside mirrors manually for your best driving position and then drive the vehicle above 4 MPH 7 km h Cancel or activate seat synchronization function The shift selector must be in the P Park position with the ignition switch placed in the ACC posi tion Confirming memory storage Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds When the memory has stored the position the indicator light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must
355. he steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement To minimize the amount of prompts spoken by the system in Alternate Command Mode use the Minimize Voice Feedback function To access the Minimize Voice Feedback function press the SETTING button then select the Others key Then select the Voice Recognition key How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits 0 zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house numbe
356. he tire pressure The Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected The Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off The Check Tire Pressure warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated The Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction 5 4 Starting and driving Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates check the tire pressure for all four tires The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening You can also check the tire pressure of all tires expect the spare on the vehicle infor mation display screen if so equipped The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position
357. he tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks includ ing tire pressure checks See Changing Wheels and Tires in Maintenance amp Do It Yourself section Many factors includ ing tire inflation alignment driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long Use the tire replace ment indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks Failure to per form regular tire checks including tire pressure checks could result in tire fail ure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision which could result in serious personal injury or death Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for checking or replacing main tenance items other than the engine oil oil filter and tires Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items Alarms This setting allows the customer to set alarms for outside temperature and a timer alert 1 Press the button 2 Use the button until Settings is se lected and press ENTER 3 Select Alarms using the buttons and press ENTER Outside Temperature This setting allows the customer to enable disable the alert for low outside te
358. he vehicle may be moved to the desired location Replace the removed shift lock re lease cover after the operation If the shift selector cannot be moved out of the P Park position have a NISSAN dealer check the CVT system as soon as possible AWARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Overdrive O D OFF switch if so equipped When the O D OFF switch is pushed with the shift selector in the D Drive position the Orr light in the instrument panel illuminates See Overdrive off indicator light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im proved engine braking To turn off the Overdrive off mode push the O D OFF switch again The OFF indicator light will turn off Each time the engine is started or when the shift selector is shifted to any position other than D Drive the Overdrive off mode will be automati cally turned off Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode If the f
359. hen the ignition switch is turned from ACC to LOCK with the driver s door open The driver s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position When the driver s door is closed with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P Park position The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display by performing the following Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to OFF Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit function You can also restart the entry exit function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position 3 38 Pre driving checks and adjustments The entry exit function should now work properly SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION The position of the following settings can be linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key e Climate control system e Navigation system if so equipped Audio system To use the memory function set the climate navigation and audio syst
360. hile the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury e Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged Sa
361. hown 2nd row similar Seat belt hook When the seat belt is not in use and when folding down the rear seats hook the rear seat belts on the seat belt hooks SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased The extender adds approximately 200 mm 8 in of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating posi tion Seat belt extenders are available for the Driver and front passenger seating position 2nd and 3rd row seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur chasing an extender if an extender is required AWARNING e Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts e Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident e Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 27 SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom me
362. hrough the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device
363. ht a may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important information concerning the following systems Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact and roll over supplemental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or roll over Collisions In a side impact the curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehic
364. ice recognition systems 4 137 Delete Phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone Turn Bluetooth OFF Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone VOICE ADAPTATION VA MODE Voice Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different voice adaptation model for each connected phone Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park Press and hold the The system announces button for more than 5 seconds Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE END button to select a different lan guage Press the button For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language in this section Voic
365. icle is driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met The Reset key is selected The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again Where am Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Traffic Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Weather Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Map Update Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Navigation Version Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Other options For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section For GPS Position refer to the separate Naviga tion System Owner s Manual Settings 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Display Others Bluetooth LHA1236 LHA1236 HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the Set tings screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and
366. icle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed See Head restraints in this sec tion for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section PY OFF LRSO865 7 If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status lig
367. ight blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration Instruments and controls 2 15 avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer A CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system OD j indi i OFF Overdrive OFF indicator light if so equipped This light comes on when the overdrive function is OFF The automatic transmission overdrive function is controlled by the overdrive switch For additional information see Driving the ve hicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual 2 16 Instruments and controls Security indicator light This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational For additional information see Security sys
368. ightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Capacity Approximate Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 19 1 2 gal 16 1 4 gal 74 See Fuel recommendation later in this section Engine oil 7 Drain and Refill With oil filter change 5 1 8 qt 4 1 4 qt 4 8 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 1 2 Without oil filter 4 3 4 qt 4 qt 4 5 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 1 2 change Cooling system With reservoir 2 1 2 gal 2 1 8 gal 9 8 Pre diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 3 3 Power steering fluid PSF Genuine NISSAN E PSF or equivalent 4 Differential gear oil Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi Synthetic API GL 5 Viscosity SAE 75W 90 8 Transfer fluid API GL 5 Viscosity SAE 80W 90 or equivalent Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 5 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi purpose grease 3 NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base Air conditioning system refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a 6 Air conditioning system oil Genuine NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 6 Windshield washer fluid 1 gal 7 8 gal 3 8 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze fluid or equivalent 1
369. ild restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments LRS0674 Rear facing step 4 4 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH at tachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 4 WRS0256 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it c
370. ile engine is running The 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates simultaneously along with the 4WD AUTO indi cator light when selecting the LOCK mode The 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminates when selecting the AUTO mode If the 4WD warning light illuminates the 4WD mode indicator lights will turn off PARKING PARKING ON HILLS co co a o oe a ASS ee WSD0050 AWARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire e Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re sult in an accident Make sure the shift selector has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal e Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion 3 To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated Starting and driving 5 25 e HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CU
371. ill be displayed on the screen Changing the maintenance interval Select one of the Reminder keys Engine Oil Oil Filter Tire or Other Reminder using the NISSAN controller to display the screen to change the maintenance interval Select the Interval key using the NISSAN con troller Use the NISSAN controller to change the maintenance interval To accept the changes press the BACK button Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati cally at the set maintenance interval The indica tor light will illuminate when it is ON The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle is driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met The Reset key is selected The Interva
372. indshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision 1O WDI0594 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 1 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place ol Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION e After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 _ WDI0570 If
373. ing after tight ening the fuel filler cap TILT TELESCOPIC STEERING AWARNING e Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident e Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort The driver s air bag inflates with great force If you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel Always use the seat belts Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 LPD2111 WPD0366 MANUAL OPERATION if so equipped Tilt and telescopic operation Pull the lock lever down e Adjust the steerin ward in direction wheel forward or back to the desired position Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction to the desired position Push the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC OPERATION if so equipped Tilt and telescopic operation To adjust the steering wheel move the switch in the following directions Adjust the steering wheel forward or back ward in direction to the desired tele scopic position
374. ing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle e When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu pants or damage the vehicle A CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nected to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem
375. ing lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds once NOTE e Request switches for all doors and lift gate can be deactivated when the I Key Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle in formation display For additional infor mation see Vehicle information dis play in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open However doors lock with the me chanical key even if any door is open Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key A CAUTION After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the rear liftgate opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de tected by the Intelligent Key system Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 Lockout protection
376. ing operation at high speeds or by care less or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e The active trace control and brake force distribution systems may not be effec tive depending on the driving condition Always drive carefully and attentively e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling per formance and the VDC warning light may illuminate If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC warning light may illuminate When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate prop erly and the VDC warning light may illu minate Do not drive on these types of roads e When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the VDC warning light may illumi nate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving
377. ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 61 severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in certain side collisions Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers As a result certain vehicle movements for example during severe off roading may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants Curtain and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in
378. ion AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others LIC2389 WIC1439 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Push the button to increase the bright ness of instrument panel lights when driving at night Push the button to decrease the bright ness of instrument panel lights when driving at night TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signal cancels automatically Lane change signal To signal a lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch The turn signal will flash three times automati cally Instruments and controls 2 35 WIC1440 Type A 2 36 Instruments and controls WIC1513 Type B FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 22 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position the headlights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the 0 posi tion To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the
379. ion Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the sys tem also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road t
380. ion is still per formed the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate In a safe location stop the engine and push the igni tion switch to the OFF position The temperature of the power steering system will go down after a period of time and the power assist level will return to normal after starting the engine The power steering warning light will go off Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to over heat You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated This is a normal operational noise and is not a malfunction If the electric power steering warning light PSil luminates while the engine is running it may indicate the power steering system is not func tioning properly and may need servicing Have the power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running there will be no power assist for the steering but you will still have control of the vehicle At this time greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel especially in sharp turns and at low speeds For additional information see Power steering warning light in the Instruments and controls section BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels
381. ions understeer vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steer ing input oversteer vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle but it can not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations When the VDC system operates the R indi cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light in the Instru ments and controls section If a malfunction occurs in the system the f and indicator lights come on in the instru ment panel The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system The 8 indicator illuminates to indi cate the VDC system is off When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel The f indicator flashes if this occurs All other VDC
382. ir bag and status light in this section Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2138 2nd row bench seat 1 Top tether strap 2 Anchor point INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP 2nd row bench seat First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors 2nd row bench outboard seating positions only or the seat belt as applicable 1 OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS If necessary raise or remove the head re straint to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure The passenger side of the 3rd row bench seat is place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint the seating position that can use a top tether when the child restraint is removed See strap Head restraint adjustment in this section for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information CENTER SEATING POSITION Remove the headrest and position the top tether strap over the seatback or adjust the headrest to the lowest position and po sition the top tether strap over the headrest First secure the child restraint with the seat belt as applicable 1 Position the top tether strap to the out board side
383. ir hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the vehicle s battery is disconnected replaced or jump started the power window auto reverse function may not operate properly If this occurs please contact the dealer to re initialize the power window auto reverse system If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing the window will be immediately low ered MOONROOF if so equipped Ome LIC2313 AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for a period of time even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of time the power to the moonroof is canceled Instruments and controls 2 53 Sliding the moonroof To fully open or close the moonroof push the switch to the open or close position and release it it need not be held The roof will automatically open or close all the way To stop the roof push the switch once more while it is opening or closing Tilting the moonroof To tilt up first close the moonroof then push the switch to the tilt up position and release it it need not be held To tilt down the moonroof push the switch to the tilt down position Restarting the moonroof switch If the
384. is section SUN VISORS sv D amp a B A WPD0297 Toblock glare from the front swing down the sun visor To block glare from the side remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed ACAUTION e Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 MIRRORS LPD2067 WPD0126 VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open 3 32 Pre driving checks and adjustments REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The night position reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position when driving in daylight hours AWARNING Use the night position only when neces sary because it reduces rear view clarity AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims during night time conditions and ac cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic
385. isplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset key using the NISSAN controller 12 00 Information gt Fuel Economy Record Hel Reset Interval Latest Push BACK for previous screen LHA0922 Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the View key using the NISSAN controller The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous reset to reset period Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 i _ Information gt Maintenance 6000 12000 18000 Engine Oil Oil Filter Tire Other Reminder 6000 12000 18000 miles MUL e LHA1302 i Information gt Other Reminder o 6000 12000 18000 Reset Distance Interval Crio Reminder o ON C 1 1 gt C L 1 o 8000 12000 18000 miles SCC iene SHO Oc Oro e Le LHA1303 LHA0839 Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance key using the NISSAN controller the maintenance information w
386. istributing hitch system Class IV is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight distributing hitch system NOTE A weight distributing hitch system may af fect the operation of trailer surge brakes If you are considering use of a weight distributing hitch system with a surge brake equipped trailer check with the surge brake hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done Follow the instructions provided by the manufac turer for installing and using the weight distributing hitch system General set up instructions are as follows 1 Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and the doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within O 5 inches 0 13 mm of the reference height measured in step 2 The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2 AWARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached If the rear bumper is higher than th
387. itch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue king pin load use the following proce dure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue king pin load Technical and consumer information 9 19 To determine the available towing capacity use the following procedure 1 Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load Specificatio
388. ith a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand off follow the procedure be low 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Lock the glove box with the mechanical key 3 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Storage in the Instruments and controls section of this manual 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks The valet key cannot be used for the glove box lock To protect your belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the valet key only Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase
389. ith the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Additional information The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire Starting and driving 5 3 The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted on all 4 tires After all 4 tires are inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check t
390. ith which your vehicle is equipped READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil iarity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the influence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you e ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Pre teen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information For descriptions specified for four wheel drive models a 4WD mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections items As with other vehicles with features for off road use failure to operate four wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read Driving safety precautions in the Start ing and driving section of this manual ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIV ING
391. itor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Language Units 12 00 ry ry B Select Language E Select Units Select language LHA0934 Language Units Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan guage Units key Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller Settings gt Select Language 12 00 R R Engish Fran ais eva i Select system language LHA0935 Settings gt Select Units US Metric divonn duoonnrenniinn ni LHA0936 Select Language Select the English key the Fran ais key or the Espa ol key to change the language shown on the display Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display 2 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the 2 OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller The display brightness can also be adjusted us ing the brighter button or the dimmer button If no operation is done within 10 seconds the display will return to the previous display Press and hold the 2 OFF button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off Press t
392. itor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 141 phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this sec tion Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and connecting You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult
393. ive delete phone dial eight three zero five one record name four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phonebook list names call eight oh five four one correction connect phone dial seven four oh one eight previous entry delete dial nine seven two six six call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven MANUAL CONTROL While using the voice recognition system it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands This can be especially helpful if the noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice recognition system to accurately interpret com mands The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists To re activate voice recognition exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding the PHONE END button At that time pressing the PHONE SEND _ button will start the Hands Free Phone System Operating tips To enter manual control mode start the voice recognition system and tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will speak Showing Manual Options when manual controls are initially activated To browse the menu options tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will always speak the current menu option De pending on the audio display it will also sho
394. jects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground The system may not detect the follow ing objects Fluffy objects such as snow cloth cotton glass or wool Thin objects such as rope wire or chain Wedge shaped objects If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of ob jects or false alarms A CAUTION Excessive noise such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard e Keep the surface of the sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumper fascia free from accumulations of snow ice and dirt Do not scratch the surface of the sonar sensors when cleaning If the sensors are covered the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished The system gives the tone for rear objects when the shift selector is in the R Reverse position The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph 10 km h It is reactivated at lower speeds When the objects are detected the indicator green appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently When the vehicle moves closer to the object the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the tone increase When the vehicle is very close to the object the indicator stops blinking and turns red and the tone sounds continuously
395. justable headrest 2 Adjustment notches 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 gt WRS0134 LRS2204 LRS2205 Adjustment To raise the headrest pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant s ears 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2206 oo LRS2207 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable headrests 1 Pull the headrest up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the headrest from the seat 4 Store the headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating posi tion Install 1 Align the headrest stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the headrest is facing the correct direction The stalk with the ad justment notches must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 1 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down 3 Properly adjust the headrest before an oc cupant uses the seating position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system HEAD RESTRAINTS 3rd row AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against inju
396. k the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM if so equipped LDI2132 A CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely e Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area DRIVE BELT LDI2099 Drive belt auto
397. ked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may per manently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious ve hicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS ACAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly
398. ks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the rear vent windows lifigates doors and trunk lids if so equipped closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen ger compartment If you must drive with one of these open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle e The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the ex
399. l Reminder ON key is set to OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again 8 00 Settings Up Audio Display Switch Beeps Camera Clock SONG orient Le Adjust tone amp advanced audio settings LHA1304 Settings gt Display Auto Day 12 00 Display Brightness Contrast Background Color Toggles display on and off LHA0929 HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the Set tings screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System in this section Display settings Select the Display key The Display settings screen will appear Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 Settings gt Display Auto Day 12 00 123456789 Display Brightness Contrast Background Color co TIMI Push ENTER to adjust brightness doorn an LHA0930 Push DAY NIGHT button to resume display WHA0823 Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map background Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or bri
400. l nut wrench as illustrated and rotate counterclockwise to release Insert the flat end of the wheel nut wrench into the slot of the fastener and rotate counterclockwise to release the jack 5 The lowering mechanism for the spare tire is located on the passenger side of the cargo area Remove the cover to access the spare tire winch In case of emergency 6 5 LCE2039 6 Insert the spare tire winch socket A to the lowering mechanism nut 7 To lower the spare tire insert the wheel nut wrench to the extension and insert the T shaped end to the winch socket and rotate counterclockwise 8 After removing the spare tire from under the vehicle be sure to crank the cable up to stow it NOTE Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle before attempting to remove the winch from the spare tire 6 6 In case of emergency ACAUTION e Make sure safety cable is coiled above spare tire when reinstalling spare tire wheel When re installing the spare tire under the vehicle after use be sure to secure it with the tire stem facing down toward the ground If the spare tire is improp erly secured with the tire stem facing up towards the bottom of the vehicle there is an increased risk of separating from the vehicle in the event of crash which may pose a hazard in traffic or risk of injury to others Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING e Never get
401. l restraint system WRS0762 Rear facing step 5 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 7 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 1 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position
402. l satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH CD DVD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Bal ance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or C
403. l the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed NOTE Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad justed See Vehicle information display in this section To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for a period of time If another door is opened while the headlights are on then the timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF 300 or 2 position Instruments and controls 2 33 aa AE noo ar gt S a eee LIC2237 WIC1438 Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sensor controls the autolight if it is cov ered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged 2 34 Instruments and controls Headlight beam select To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on and the
404. lates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater e Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth Instruments and controls 2 37 HEATED REAR SEATS if so equipped e When cleaning the seat never use AWARNING e When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi gasoline benzine thinner or any simi Gr matenas Do not use or allow occupants to use the lanmaterlals seat heater if you or the occupants cannot If any malfunctions are found or the monitor elevated seat temperatures or If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the have an inability to feel pain in body parts heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked that contact the seat Use of the seat switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer heater by such people could result in se by a NISSAN dealer rious injury A CAUTION e The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overhe
405. lbs e ha t alee a 8 26 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning light si arta Ht a eae R oe 2 25 Passenger air bag and status light 1 58 Security indicator light 2 16 Spotlights See map light 2 58 Warning indicator lights and audible FOMINGES ee eo de Ee 2 10 Lights Map lights eai e Sane oats ee ace 2 58 Lock Child safety rear doorlock 3 7 10 4 Glove box lock Lift gate release Power door locks Loose fuel cap warning Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light Luggage hook Luggage rack see roof rack Luggage See vehicle loading information Luggage storage see vehicle loading information Changing the maintenance interval 4 8 4 22 Displaying the maintenance notice General maintenance Inside the vehicle Maintenance precautions Outside the vehicle Resetting the maintenance interval 4 8 4 22 Seat belt maintenance Under the hood and vehicle Malfunction indicator light Manual front seat adjustment Meters and gauges Instrument brightness control Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror lnsid mirror 23 64 bee ee a Outside mirror control Outside mirrors 1 ee ee Vanity mirror e eo cede a ad e a ari ue MoOGinrootis sisas ae ak we a ae a NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 28 3 4 NISSAN voice recognition system o Oct
406. le is impacted In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finish ers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 sec onds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 49 a ha Sit upright and well back WRS0031 AWARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents e The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later i
407. ler EE STOP Select this key and press the ENTER button to stop playing the DVD To stop playing the DVD it is also possible to press the stop button on the keypad of the re mote controller 4 122 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems P SKIP FORWARD Select this key and press the ENTER button to skip the chapter s of the disc forward The chap ters will advance the number of times the ENTER button is pressed To skip the chapter s forward it is also possible to press the corresponding button on the keypad of the remote controller 4 q SKIP REWIND Select this key and press the ENTER button to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will go back the number of times the ENTER button is pressed To skip the chapter s backward it is also pos sible to press the corresponding button on the keypad of the remote controller Commercial Skip This function is only for DVD VIDEO and DVD VR Select this key to skip forward or backwards by the set amount as defined in the DVD settings menu To skip forward or backward it is also possible to press the corresponding button on the keypad of the remote controller DVD Setting Title Menu 10Key Search Angle Angle Mark SAA2498 Front screen DVD 01 002 00 12 28 Cites Cen A B PLAY SKIP D E STOP l SKIP C l CM F l CM SAA3082 Rear sc
408. liftgate gas stays Have the liftgate inspected by a NISSAN dealer e Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate gas stays are removed Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate mechanisms may occur SPA2778 Manual liftgate release Manual liftgate release if so equipped If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked with the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a discharged battery follow these steps 1 Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate 2 Move the lever B as illustrated to open the liftgate Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for repair SPA2778 Power liftgate release if so equipped If the liftgate cannot be opened with the instru ment panel switch liftgate opener switch or key fob due to a discharged battery follow these steps 1 Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate 2 Move the lever as illustrated to open the liftgate Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for repair LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height by performing the following 1 Open the liftgate using the request switch or the Intelligent Key 2 Pull the liftgate down to the desired position and hold the liftgate the liftgate will have some resistance when being manually ad justed 3 While holding the liftgate in position press and hold the liftgate switch CJ located on the liftgate
409. lights 0 0008 8 27 Wheels and tires 0 000 e cece eee eee ees 8 30 Tire PrOSSULC dreceres sarni eoe erens bed ove eds 8 30 Tire labeliNgi rres risser tate uris era hea ees 8 33 JYP S Of tire Siere sates aaa ieee NEE ENR 8 36 Tire chans uee tend ee aei EEEE weet 8 37 Changing wheels and tires 00 8 37 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to
410. line be used because this will damage the three way catalyst e Do not use E 15 or E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 15 or E 85 fuel Using E 15 or E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 15 or E 85 fuel can ad versely affect the emission control de vices and systems of the vehicle Dam age caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of
411. ller NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say Help 4 Select the Command List key using the NISSAN controller 4 166 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN controller to view the entire list 7 Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen Alternate Command Mode command list Phone Command Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken as well as star pound and plus Call lt name gt Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either the Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook Please say Call followed by a stored name Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls Missed Calls Shows the last 5 missed phone calls Navigation Command Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination Minimize Freeway Route Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 167 Zoom Out lt 1 to 13 gt Changes the map scale to a larger number Guidance Voice ON OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance Information Command Displays the current weather map Audio Command COMMAND ACTION X Zoom I
412. llowing conditions Receiving a call on the Hands Free Phone System Checking the connection to the hands free phone Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con nection disruption While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile A2DP AVRCP BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and licensed to Clarion Co Ltd Bluetooth CD or USB with Compressed Audio Files models without Navigation System The file types supported by this system are MP3 and WMA Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Micro soft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers
413. locking or unlocking 2 the glove box AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop 2 48 Instruments and controls CONSOLE BOX Upper half Pull up on the driver s side latch to open the upper half of the console box The upper half of the console box may be used for storage of cellular phones An access hole is provided at the front of the upper half of the console box for a phone or iPod cord routing to the power outlet Lower half Pull up on the passenger s side latch to open the lower half of the console box A power outlet is located inside the console box and there is stor age for compact discs LIC2214 LIC2208 STORAGE TRAY AWARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sud den stop LUGGAGE HOOKS When securing items using luggage hooks lo cated on the back of the seat or side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6 5 Ibs 29 N to a single hook The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less then 110 Ibs 490 N toa single hook The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury
414. lowed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed e Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck ACAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN LCE2049 Four wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the ve hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated ACAUTION Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain In case of emergency 6 13 LCE2050 Front Wheel Drive models NISSAN recom
415. ludes the following floor mat po sitioning aids to help keep your floor mats in place two driver s side front floor mat brackets two passenger s side front floor mat bracket one driver s side 2nd row floor mat bracket one passenger s side 2nd row floor mat bracket Appearance and care 7 5 Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The floor mats have grommet holes incorporated in them Posi tion each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while centering the mat in the floorwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing 7 6 Appearance and care CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS ACAUTION Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre vent reduction of ability to move the seats Clean periodically with a high powered vacuum cleaner Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to adjust the seat A wet cleansing agent may be
416. luid Brake fluid zs sa g 2240 cee baie 8 12 Capacities and recommended fuel lubniGants ss a aces et eee ied 9 2 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid seei pea ee at bee ae d 8 11 Engine coolants ss i css Gee ee 8 7 Engineioill sas dis eke ee eae ead 8 9 Power steering fluid 8 12 Windshield washer fluid 8 13 F M V S S certification label 0 2 0 9 10 Fog light switch soss s po saiae aaa 2 36 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 1 56 Front seats e a i kt ete see ee te Soe al a 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 2 2 2 ee 9 2 Fueleconomy 220005 5 22 Fuel fillerdoorandcap 3 27 FUG Gauge saeson eae Raa i 2 5 Fuel octane rating 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Loose fuel cap warning 2 26 3 28 BUSES 6 osu ain Ha aoa ee rea Reta 8 21 Fusible links 2 2 0 00 a o 0008 8 22 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 2 0 0 000 2a 2 59 2 63 GaSiGap isi eed ved sy eee Pa ea 3 27 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuel gauge 2 05 20k ee be eee 2 5 Odometer csd ee aiea eee ee ee 2 4 Speedometer 000004 2 4 Tachometer 0 000000 2 4 Trip odometer 2 2 220000 2 4 General maintenance 0 8 2 GIOVE BOK ts aie ast a ek ak G a 2 48 Glove boxlock 000 2 48 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth
417. luid temperature be comes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated The MIL may come on to indicate the fail safe mode is activated see Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instrument and controls sec tion This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then push the switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal op erating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary Starting and driving 5 17 AWARNING When the high fluid temperature protec tion mode or fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially care ful when driving If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe plac
418. m and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the _ Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to come on e Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments e Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION Do not use E 15 or E 85 fuel in your vehicle For further information see the Fuel Recommendation in the Techni cal and consumer information section of this manual e The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap pear if the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap pears may cause the L Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to illuminate If the L
419. m may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Anti lock Braking System ABS warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient if both the brake warning light and the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminate it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the brake system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Avoid high speed driv ing and abrupt braking See Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light in this section Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately Instruments and controls 2 11 A CAUTION e Do not gr
420. mall children 2 2 1 29 Injured Person 2 2 ee eee 1 24 Larger children 2 2 eee eee 1 29 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 21 Pregnant women 00 1 24 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 63 Seat belt extenders 1 27 Seat belt maintenance 1 28 Seat belts ccs ea ee e 1 21 Three point type with retractor 1 24 Seat belt warning light 2 14 Seats AdjUSIME Nts se bene earair eS 1 2 Automatic drive positioner 3 35 Front seats fous ok Ra eda amp a ole 1 2 Heated seats 2 37 2 38 2 41 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Security indicator light 2 16 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 28 3 4 5 13 Self adjusting brakes 8 20 Service manual order form 9 32 Servicing air conditioner 4 58 Setting button 04 4 9 4 23 Spark plug replacement 8 17 Speedometer 200 00008 2 4 Spotlights See map light 2 58 SRS warning label 00 1 64 Starting Before starting the engine 5 13 JUMP Starting sae eat ek ee ed 6 9 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Pushistarting 644 6 cee ke a es 6 11 Starting the engine 5 13 Steering Heated steering wheel 2 39 Power steering fluid 8 12 Power steering system 5 26 Steering
421. matic tensioner Generator A C compressor Crankshaft pulley AWARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly RON 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer 2 Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide SPARK PLUGS ae Ee SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service iridium tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap ping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer for assistance Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 AIR CLEANER LDI2090 NOTE The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
422. mends that your vehicle be towed with the driving wheels front off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated 6 14 Incase of emergency AWARNING e Never tow your vehicle with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is nec essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels When towing with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and secure the steering wheel in the straight ahead position with a rope or similar device VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle LT12040 Pulling a stuck vehicle AWARNING To avoid vehicle damage serious per sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle e Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure e Attach recovery devices only to main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hooks e Do not use the vehicle tie downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle e Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer s instructions e Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle Never pull at an angle e Route recovery devices so they do not touch any par
423. modes that are available for your vehicle Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 Settings gt Display 8 00 Display Adjustment Color Theme LHA1237 Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Display 3 Brightness Contrast Background Color 1 4 WHA1502 Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Display 3 Brightness Contrast Backgroud Color Chiese ee E gt Push to change O modes 2 4 LHA1239 Display settings Select the Display key On the screen above select the Display Adjustment key The Display Adjustment screen will appear 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display background Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Push the switch to activate the display LHA2562 Display off Select the Display ON key The indicator of the Display ON turns off and the message above will be
424. moonroof does not operate properly per form the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system 1 Turn ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch for ward until the moonroof stops 3 Release the moonroof switch 4 Press and hold the tilt up switch within 6 seconds 5 The roof glass will Tilt Down Slide Close Slide Open Slide Close Tilt Up Tilt Down 2 54 Instruments and controls 6 Release the switch initialization is complete if the moonroof operates normally If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above have your ve hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to t
425. mpera ture in the vehicle information display 1 Use the buttons to select Outside Temperature 2 Press the ENTER button to turn ON OFF the outside temperature in the vehicle infor mation display Timer Alert This setting allows the customer to set an alert to notify the driver that the set time has been reached 1 Use the buttons to select Timer Alert 2 Press the ENTER button 3 To change the timer amount use the buttons and the ENTER button to save the selected time amount Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allows the customer to change settings for interior lights intelligent key settings unlock settings and other vehicle set tings The vehicle settings can be changed using and the ENTER buttons Welcome light if so equipped The welcome light can be set to be ON or OFF From the Vehicle Settings menu select Wel come Light Use the ENTER button to turn this feature ON or OFF Auto Room Lamp The interior lights can be set to be ON or OFF if any door is unlocked From the Vehicle Settings menu select Auto Room Light Use the ENTER button to turn this feature ON or OFF Light Sensitivity if so equipped the F The light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier based on the brightness outside the vehicle From the Vehicle Settings menu select Light Sensitivity Use the ENTER button to change the sensitivity Light Off Delay
426. mple if the engine has been running for 5 minutes and 10 minutes are added the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes A maximum of two remote starts or a single start with an extension are allowed between ignition cycles The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position be fore the remote start procedure can be used again CANCELING A REMOTE START To cancel a remote start perform one of the following Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and press and hold Q until the parking lights turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START WILL NOT WORK The remote start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition The hood is not securely closed The hazard warning lights are on The I Key Indicator Light remains solid in the vehicle information display The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed Two remote vehicle starts or a single remote start with an extension have already been used The vehicle is not in P Park e The Remote Start function has been switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Set
427. ms are available wheel o Entry 2 Select the Vehicle Phonebook key Changes the displayed number of the se 3 Select the desired entry from the displayed lected entry list Name 4 Select the Edit key Edit the name of the entry using the keypad displayed on the screen Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen Type Select the icon from the icon list 4 146 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag Voicetags allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more information see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section To delete an entry select the Delete key at step 3 HANDSET PHONEBOOK Many phones will support an automatic down load of the cellular phone s phonebook Since this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be stored and entries are automatically assigned voice tags by the system this is a useful function for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni tion system Settings gt Phone Go Ml Yu 8 00 Edit Vehicle Phonebook Delete Phonebook Download Handset Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Auto Downloaded Add or edit phonebook entries LHA1319 Transferring the handset phonebook If your cellular phone supports automatic down loading the system transfers the handset phone book
428. n chart found later in this section 2 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum towing capacity To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed onascale including passengers cargo and hitch 6 350 Ib 2 880 kg 9 20 Technical and consumer information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 7 250 Ib 3 289 kg Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR from Towing Load Specification chart 15 100 Ib 6 849 kg Maximum Trailer towing capacity from Tow ing Load Specification chart 9 100 Ib 4 128 kg 7 250 lb 3 289 kg 6 350 Ib 2 880 kg GVWR GVW 900 Ib 409 kg Available for tongue weight 15 100 Ib 6 849 kg
429. n tain adequate control reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descend ing a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine brak ing and reduces the need to brake as fre quently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the
430. n The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster RR GY O WIC1460 Type B NOTE The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system These wires make up the antenna for the audio system Instruments and controls 2 31 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH 20 WIC1435 WIC1436 Type A WIC1510 Type B Type C HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting When turning the switch to the D posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on When turning the switch to the 2 osi g p tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on 2 32 Instruments and controls A CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery LIC2351 Autolight system The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep al
431. n lt 1 to 13 gt Changes the map scale to a smaller number Turns to the AM band selecting the station last played Turns to the FM banad selecting the station last played C SSSS d ms tothe AUXnp Sd PM Turns to the SAT band selecting the station last played AM FM M CD USB AUX 4 168 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information gt User Guide 8 00 Getting Started Let s Practice Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Help on Speaking LHA1343 Information gt User Guide 8 00 Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Help on Speaking Voice Recognition Settings Adapting the System to Your Voice LHA1344 Displaying user guide You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Others key 3 Select the Voice Recognition key 4 Select the User Guide key 5 Select an item Available items e Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system e Let s Practice Initiates a practice session that demon strates how to improve recognition by the system Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book
432. n mm in mm in mm in mm Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg 197 2 5 008 4 77 2 1 960 69 6 1 67 5 75 4 1 914 2 65 7 1 670 1 14 2 2 900 See the F M V S S C M V S S certification label on the center pillar between the driver s side front and rear doors WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION T11050M LTI2028 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIO
433. n oil fluid should be changed more fre quenily For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home ACAUTION e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication e For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Continuously Variable Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufac turer s recommendations when using their prod uct UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Tread
434. n on If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected press the AUX button re peatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode 4 104 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod interface Use the NISSAN controller and the BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Playlists Podcasts e Songs Albums Artists Genres Composers Audiobooks The following keys shown on the screen are also available MENU returns to the previous screen e Pll plays pauses the music selected SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the 4 SEEK CAT button or gt gt I TRACK button is pressed for less than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played When the M4 SEEK CAT button or PPI TRACK button is pressed for more than 1 5 sec onds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed LHA2475 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod ACAUTION e Depending on size and shape of the
435. n the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the steering wheel moves to the previous position For more information for setting the steering wheel posi tion see Tilt and telescopic operation in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Use the ENTER button to enable disable this function Language The language of the vehicle information display can be changed to e US English French Spanish Use the andthe ENTER buttons to select and change the language of the vehicle information display The language of the center display navigation can be changed indepen dently of the vehicle information display For ve hicles not equipped with Navigation see SET TING button and vehicles equipped with Navigation see System in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual Units The units that are shown in the vehicle informa tion display can be changed Mileage Tire pressures Temperature Use the and the ENTER buttons to select and change the units of the vehicle infor mation display The units of the navigation screen can be changed independently of the vehicle information display For vehicles equipped with Navigation see System in the Monitor climate audio phone and voi
436. n Park P with the parking brake engaged to watch movies from a USB device Folder List Track List Displays the folder or track list The Movie Playback key is also displayed in this list screen and enables you to switch to the movie playback mode Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode using the NISSAN controller or the touchscreen M4 Skip LHA1379 Movie file operation Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the USB memory while watching the images DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the USB memory is inserted press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 Operation keys lt q Previous Chapter Rewind To operate the USB memory select the desired USB gt Settings key displayed on the display screen Select the M4 key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will go Audio File Play Back e ul Pause back the number of times the key is selected Play Mode Normal Press and hold the key to rewind the chap 10Key Search Selectthe Il key to pause the movie file ter Display To resume playing the movie file use List DRC gt
437. n a single power cycle or if battery voltage is low If the power liftgate opener switch is pushed during power open or close the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated manually To open the liftgate manually press the liftgate opener switch and lift the liftgate To close lower and push the liftgate down se curely Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 SPA2547 POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH The power liftgate operation can be turned on or off by the power liftgate main switch on the instrument panel When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to the OFF position the power operation is not available by the power liftgate switch on the liftgate and liftgate opener switch Power operation is available when in the OFF position by the instrument panel switch and the keyfob button 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments LIFTGATE RELEASE AWARNING e Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from open ing while driving Do not drive with the liftgate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual A CAUTION e If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds do not operate the lift gate There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the
438. n case of emergency 6 3 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P Park e Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance 6 4 In case of emergency Me Q wv WCE0044 LCE2035 Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury Getting the spare tire and tools 1 Open the liftgate and lift the luggage board in the cargo area using the handle LCE2036 LCE2037 LCE2038 2 Remove the jack and tool kit cover by lifting up using the handles 3 Remove the tool kit To release the tool kit release the hook and eye straps 4 Remove the jack The jack is secured by a fastener to release the fastener assemble the exten sion into the whee
439. n commands Displays Navigation function commands Displays Vehicle Information Displays Audio commands Displays User Guide Phone Command Navigation Command COMMAND ACTION Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route for continental US and Canada only Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination 4 158 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Vehicle Information Command COMMAND ACTION Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information Displays Maintenance information Traffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off Where am Displays current vehicle location Audio Command COMMAND ACTION Changes the audio system mode to AM radio Changes the audio system mode to FM radio Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio Changes the audio system mode to CD Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 159 Voice command examples Some basic voice command examples are de scribed here For navigation system commands see the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual LHA2479 8 00 Voice Recognition E 44 Phone Navigation 4 Inform
440. n driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery kk k cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset Fuel Eco key using the NISSAN controller Information gt Fuel Eco History 8 00 Reset Interval Latest LHA1233 Information gt Maintenance 8 00 7 o 6000 12000 18000 Engine Oil Et ti Oil Filter Tire Other Reminder o 6000 12000 18000 miles LHA1234 Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the Fuel Eco History key using the NISSAN controller The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset to Reset period Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance key using the NISSAN controller the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice rec
441. n farther than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 LHA1201 LHA1202 Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines do not touch the object in the display However the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course Backing up behind a projecting object The position is shown farther than the position in the display However the position is actually at the same distance as the position The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems the position if the object projects over the actual backing up course PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SETTINGS To turn on or off the predictive course line display press the SETTING button select the Camera key and press the ENTER button Predictive Course Lines When this item is turned on the predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift selector is the R Reverse position HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN To adjust the Display ON OFF Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor press the SETTING button with the RearVie
442. n the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and connecting instruc tions You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected t
443. n this section e The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags as needed Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an Occupant Classification Sensor weight sensor that turns the front pas senger air bag OFF under some condi tions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident See Front passenger air bag and sta tus light later in this section Keep hands on the out
444. name to speak when using the Voice Recognition system Select the Store key and prepare to speak the name after the tone When the voicetag is successfully saved select the OK key to save the phonebook entry After the phonebook entry is saved it will show a screen that is ready to call the num ber Press the BACK button to return to the Vehicle Phonebook Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 145 e Copy from Call History The system will show a list of your incoming Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook 80 40 Yul 8 00 Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o cH Fui Back outgoing or missed calls that were down loaded from your cell phone depending on your phone s compatibility You may select i l Entry one of these entries to save in the vehicle S Call ntry Edit Name INFORMATION phonebook Number XXX XXXX e a INFORMATION Delete Copy from the Handset WRN The system will show your cell phone s phonebook that was downloaded depend 7 Voicetag wh ing on your phone s compatibility You may a select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook LHA1382 LHA1383 e Editing the Vehicle Phonebook 5 Select the desired item to change 1 Press the button on the steering The following editing ite
445. nd voice recognition systems Select the directional keys to move the cursor on the DVD menu Select the Enter key to fix the selected menu item Select the Move key to move the loca tion of the operation keys on the screen Select the Back key to return to the previous menu screen Select the Hide key to hide the opera tion keys Title Menu DVD VIDEO Some menus specific to each disc will be shown For details see the instructions at tached to the disc Title Search DVD VIDEO DVD VR The scene with the specified title will be displayed the number of times the or side is selected Group Search VIDEO CD The scene with the specified group will be displayed the number of times the or side is selected 10 Key Search DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD DA DVD VR Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Select No VIDEO CD Select the Select No key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key The specified scene will be played Angle DVD VIDEO If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one Select the Angle key and use the or key to
446. nded for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth e Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced CHILD SAFETY AWARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac tor ALR mode seat belts If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child s neck with the ALR mode activated the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight This can occur even if the vehicle is parked Un buckle the seat belt to release the child If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool such as a knife or scissors to release the seat belt Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources includin
447. ndividual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing Technical and consumer information 9 17 MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in t
448. ne and voice recognition systems To use the system faster you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu For example press the button and after the tone say Call Redial How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Numbers can be spoken in small groups The system will prompt you to continue en tering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six two zero zero Wen Say pound for Say star for avail able when using the Special Number com mand and the Send command during a call See List of voice commands and Special number in this section for more informa
449. ne block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection e Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury e Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury To use the engine block heater 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord 3 Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Starting and driving 5 33 4 Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet 5 The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on 6 Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts 5 34 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Emergency engine shut off 00sceseee eae 6 2 Hazard warning flash
450. necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care ACAUTION e Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spoitted e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regul
451. nema or Full display modes LHA2475 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod ACAUTION e Depending on size and shape of the iPod and iPod cable the console lid may not fully close Do not force con sole lid closed as this may damage the iPod and iPod cable e Do not force the iPod cable into the USB port Inserting the iPod cable tilted or up side down into the port may damage the iPod cable and the port Make sure that the iPod cable is con nected correctly into the USB port Some iPod cables come witha mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be fore inserting the iPod cable e Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to prevent the objects from lean ing on the iPod cable and the port Pressure from the objects may damage the iPod cable and the port To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio co
452. ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations List AM and FM Select the List key using the NISSAN controller or touchscreen to see a list of the presets in the AM FM1 or FM2 preset banks XM3 gt Favorite Artists 8 00 Alert None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist LHA1375 Menu SiriusXM Satellite Radio if so equipped Select the Menu key using the NISSAN control ler or touchscreen to see a list of options Preset List Displays the list of presets Press and hold the touchscreen or ENTER button on the NISSAN controller to save a preset Customize Channel List deselect chan nels to skip while using the TUNE FOLDER knob e Favorite Artist amp Songs 4 90 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Tags the current artist or song playing on SiriusXM Satellite Radio as a favorite Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a favorite artist or song is playing on Sirius XM Satellite Radio The audio system must be playing Sirius XM Satellite Radio for this feature to work Delete a favorite artist or song Categories Displays a category list for SiriusXM Satellite Radio Select a category to select the first
453. ness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Seat belts with pretensioners Front seats AWARNING If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not acti vated be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and if necessary re placed by your NISSAN dealer e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury e Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions Working with the seat belt retractor the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to rest
454. nformation label The label is located as the underside of the hood as shown shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE Rear surface of the license plate bracket Felt tip pen DRAW MARK where to drill the hole LTI2039 9 12 Technical and consumer information Use the following steps to mount the front license plate Before mounting the license plate confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag e License plate bracket e License plate bracket J nut screws x 2 License plate screws x 2 e Screw grommets x 2 Park the vehicle on flat level ground N Locate the center position as illustrated Line up the license plate bracket under the top of the front bumper with the tabs Hold the license plate bracket in place 3 Mark the center of the hole with a felt tip pen 4 Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0 39 in 10 mm drill bit at the marked locations Be sure that the drill only goes through the bumper fascia 5 Insert the grommets into the holes in the bumper fascia 6 Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90 LT12033 Mark the center of the hole on both sides with a felt tip pen Remove the bracket from the bum per and then open 0 79 in 20 mm diameter holes on the bumper using the marks as a
455. ng 5 2 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 63 Programmable features 4 9 4 23 Pushistarting scs 46 24a eee a 6 11 R Radio Car phone or CB radio 4 127 Compact Disc CD changer 4 77 FM AM radio with compact disc CD changer 005 4 75 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player 4 87 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD play rs i s cani aina ae a aoe og 4 80 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 112 Readiness for inspection maintenance UM teste or ee ek Bee wR Akin aed 9 31 Rear power windows 05 2 52 Rear seat air conditioner 4 52 RearView Monitor 0004 4 34 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWITCH eiiiai setae BaP eek oc ai oe be 2 31 Rear window wiper and washer switches 2 30 Recorders Eventdata 00 9 32 Refrigerant recommendation 9 6 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 9 Reporting safety defects US only 9 30 Resetting the fuel economy 4 7 4 21 Roof rack 66sec awe ee ee eae 2 50 S Safety Child safety rear doorlock 3 7 Child seat belts 1 30 1 37 1 41 1 46 Reporting safety defects US only 9 30 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Second row bench seats 1 6 1 8 Seatback pockets 2 005 2 45 Seat belt Child safety s pc ee ees 1 28 Infants and s
456. ng in the iPod may cause or ventilate the USB player completely Do not connect a USB device if a connector cable or USB port is wet Allow the connec tor cable and USB port to dry completely before connecting the USB device Wait for 24 hours or more until it is dry If the con nector and USB port are exposed to fluids other than water evaporative residue may cause a short circuit between the connector pins and USB port In this case replace the cable and USB port Otherwise damage to the USB device and a loss of function may occur a checkmark to be displayed on and off flickering Always make sure that the iPod is connected properly An iPod nano 1st Generation may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con nected during a seek operation In this case please manually reset the iPod An iPod nano 2nd Generation will con tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon nected during a seek operation 4 64 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems recognized by the in vehicle audio system It is necessary to set up the wireless con nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio Operating procedure of the Bluetooth au dio will vary depending on the devices Make sure how to operate your audio device be fore using it with this system The Bluetooth audio may be stopped un der the fo
457. ngs press the SET TING button on the instrument panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth system on or off Connect Bluetooth See Connecting procedure in this section for more information about connecting a phone Connected Devices Display a list of the Bluetooth devices con nected to the system Edit Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name device address and device PIN Replace Connected Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system This option allows you to keep any voic etags that were recorded using the previous phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 151 8 00 aco Settings gt Volume amp Beeps Audio Volume reeeeeeseees DO Guidance Volume C lOssocccsossej gt Ringtone G P cccccccccce gt Incoming Call G lasssecceossej gt outgoing call C CO gt CE e aa 1 7 Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1253 CALL VOLUME Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve clarity if reception between callers is unclear Incoming call adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume Outgoing call adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume To access the settings press the SETTING but ton then select
458. not be displayed correctly 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cannot play Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate Moves immediately to the Songs do not play back in the desired order Cause and Countermeasure Check if the CD USB device was inserted correctly Check if the CD is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Files with extensions other than MP3 or WMA cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ ing application or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc
459. now from the front of the camera AVAILABLE VIEWS AWARNING e The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a refer ence only when the vehicle is on a paved level surface The distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects If the tires are replaced with different sized tires the predictive course lines and the bird eye view may be displayed incorrectly When driving the vehicle up a hill ob jects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear When driving the ve hicle down a hill objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear Use the mirrors or actually look to prop erly judge distances to other objects Objects in the rearview will appear visu ally opposite than when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors On a snow covered or slippery road there may be a difference between the predictive course lines and the actual course line The vehicle width and predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course SAA1840 Front view Front and rearview Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distance to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the moni tor Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body Red line approximately 1 5 ft 0 5 m Yellow line approximately 3 ft 1 m Green line approximatel
460. ntal restraint system 4 LRS0889 LRS0890 To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Removal head restraints without Dual head restraint DVD system only Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seating position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 LRS0891 Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches 4 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down 3 Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position HEAD RESTRAINTS 2nd row AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or r
461. nted on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut 9 22 Technical and consumer information Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or dead weight ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a load leveling or equalizing hitch A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight hitch weight of your trailer Many ve hicles can t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels This gives stability to the tow vehicle A weight d
462. ntelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the rear liftgate are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 WPD0359 Locking doors 1 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Close all doors Press the Key button on the Intelligent The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once All doors will be locked ACAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles a a WPD0360 Unlocking doors 1 Press the tl Key button on the Intelligent 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the button again within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors NOTE The unlocking operation can be changed in Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Set tings of the vehicle information display For additional information see
463. ntenance Map Update Navigation Version Where am I l Traffic Info Show distance to empty and fuel economy Others LHA1231 Information gt Fuel Economy 8 00 Distance To Empty kkkk miles Avg Fuel Econ Fuel Econ k k E MPG Reset Fuel Eco 30 MPG Fuel Eco History LHA1232 HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button the display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your con venience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller to display Distance to Empty Average Fuel Economy and Fuel Economy History Distance to empty MI or km The Distance to Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to be displayed Whe
464. nteystee Gia Ei aan 5 26 Brake SyStem sider vases SaGaeen es eee eterna a 5 27 Brake precautions 020 cece eee eee ees 5 27 Anti lock Braking System ABS 05 5 27 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 29 Rise up and build up 00 e eee eee ee 5 30 Brake force distribution 0 eee 5 30 Hill start assist systeM 0 eee 5 31 Cold weather Grivings secsi imide osser uirre ruwa 5 32 Freeing a frozen door lock 0 eee eee 5 32 ANUFINGOZE s iea oa the tteera cto dod uacactonsany 5 32 Batten oe eect a A E E wdeiwiiel OTOT 5 32 Draining of coolant water 0 cee eee ee 5 32 Tir equipment ences edie ce deere ee nae 5 32 Special winter equipment 005 5 33 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 33 Driving on SNOW OF ie 2 eee eee 5 33 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbac
465. ntification number chassis numba hs c0ceeecsa ante hndatend eed ehats 9 9 Engine serial number 0 000 tenien ses 9 10 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Tire and loading information label 9 11 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Installing front license plate 0 0 c eee 9 12 Vehicle loading information 0 c eee nnne 9 13 TOMS gnre ureda a nr aE Ear Sac A ns 9 13 Vehicle load capacity ccc cece 9 14 Securing the load 0 seest ote eee 9 16 Loading tips serverite rian daiwa bed eee 9 17 Measurement of weights 000 00s 9 17 Towinga trailer Ses ctess acon dodasbane teem Guacde hee 9 17 Maximum load limits 0 cece eee 9 18 Towing load specification 0 c cee 9 21 TOWING Safely se ccc cei saw cede ees eee 9 21 Flattowingiacc2cseneg8cigeeres cet gapni ia 9 28 Uniform tire quality grading 0c eee eee 9 29 Emission control system warranty 005 9 30 Reporting safety defects 0cce cece eee ees 9 30 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 31 Event Data Recorders EDR 000eee eee 9 32 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 32 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be sl
466. ntrols Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 103 To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle re move the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation version 1 2 1 iPod Classic version 1 1 iPod Touch version 2 1 0 iPod Nano 1st generation version 1 3 1 iPod Nano 2nd generation version 1 1 3 iPod Nano 3rd generation version 1 0 2 Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above 8 00 Al iPod amp XXXXXX XXXXXX Ja XXXXXX 0 25 1 1 Shuffle Off Repeat Off LHA1395 HA Poa 8 00 amp XXXXXX A XXXXXX Now Playing 2 JA XXXXXX Playlists z 0 3 0 2 Artists E Shuffle Off Albums E Repeat One Songs Men E enu gt II 2 10 Down A Use lt or gt buttons to move between left right menus LHA1396 Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the iPod AUX button When the AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected the system will tur
467. nual SECURITY SYSTEMS LIC2385 Your vehicle may has two types of security sys tems Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors trunk lid or the hood when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle 3 Close all doors hood and trunk liftgate Lock all doors The doors can be locked with
468. ny more than low slung sports cars are designed to per form satisfactorily under off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns at high speeds As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help r
469. o parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury e Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to ascale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads I
470. o a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake Move the shift selector to P Park I
471. o any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury e Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or disconnected Unau thorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual WRS0381 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain and roll over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all 3 rows These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the information cautions and warn
472. o station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons lt lt gt i Press the SEEK CAT 4 button or the TRACK gt button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 and six stations can be set for the AM band 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the AM FM select button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens
473. o the vehicle s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle s speakers Settings gt Bluetooth Sod Yul 8 00 Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices Edit Bluetooth Info Replace Connected Phone LHA1316 Settings gt Bluetooth o i Yu 8 00 E d Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to use with the handsfree phone system q For audio devices please select No B Yes _ No Cancel ics 2 5 LHA1317 Settings gt Connect Bluetooth 8 00 0000_ Start connecting your Bluetooth a Basic device The PIN is 0000 Crore nN Please input passkey LHA1351 Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle follow the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Connect Bluetooth key 4 A screen will appear asking if you are con necting the device to use with the hands free phone system Select the No key 5 Enter a PIN of your choice It will be needed by your Bluetooth audio device to com plete the connection process See the Bluetooth audio device s owner s manual for more information Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 109 Bluetooth Audio
474. of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 or via e mail at nnaconsumeraffairs nissan usa com For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e mail at information centre nissancanada com If you prefer visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Exterior frontecs lt cc2accseerserelaneeabee ewan ganas 0 3 Exterior reak e mnit Gyabes nann np eiee Dn EBE ENA i 0 4 Passenger compartment sisrseriresresieercres 0 5 Instrument panel ss secesseserses sissi needa eee ivars Engine compartment check locations Warning indicator lights
475. ognition systems 4 21 Information gt Other Reminder 8 00 6000 12000 18000 Interval lt _0 mile Reminder Reset Distance o 6000 12000 18000 miles 1 3 LHA1235 Changing the maintenance interval Select one of the maintenance reminder keys using the NISSAN controller to display the screen to change the maintenance interval You can choose between Engine Oil Oil Filter Tire and Other Reminder Select the Interval key using the NISSAN control ler Touch the or keys or turn the NISSAN controller to choose the desired distance To ac cept the changes press the BACK button Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA0839 Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati cally at the set maintenance interval The indica tor light will illuminate when it is ON The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the veh
476. oid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so ACAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal 2 Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels 3 After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake 5 Shift the transmission into P Park 6 Turn off the engine To drive away ai Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake a fF WO ND Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks 6 Apply and hold the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de crease overall stability Therefore to mai
477. old tire inflation is set the factory by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI0393 Checking tire pressure 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire 2 Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge 4 Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label 5 Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed 6 Install the valve stem cap 7 Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Front and Rear Original Tire 235 55R20 Front and Rear Original Tire 235 65R18 Spare Tire T165 90D18 35 PSI 240 kPa 33 PSI 230 kPa 60 PSI 420 kPa WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the
478. omply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve hicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for instal lation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi mum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness equipped forward facing child re straint NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit For a seat belt to fit properly the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top middle portion of the shoulder The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul der The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs not the abdomen A booster seat can only be used in seating posi tions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi tioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs use
479. on displayed in the vehicle information display Main Menu Selection Body Color Maintenance Alarms Vehicle Settings Language Unit Welcome Effects Factory Reset Main Menu Selection The items that display can be enabled disabled when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position To change the items that display Use the button to select and the ENTER button to change a menu item Trip Computer Fuel Economy Tire Pressures if so equipped e AWD if so equipped Trip Computer The trip computer can be enabled disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position From the Main Menu Selection select Trip Computer to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position Fuel Economy The fuel economy can be enabled disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position From the Main Menu Selection select Fuel Economy to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position Tire Pressures The tire pressures can be enabled disabled to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position From the Main Menu Selection select Tire Pressures to display in the vehicle information display when the ignition is placed in the ON position
480. on dry hard surface roads in the AUTO or 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N posi tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD e If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section Front fog light indicator light if so equipped The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are ON See Fog light switch later in this section Front passenger air bag status OFF light The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual EO High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated Malfunction Indicator Light MIL If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may in
481. on for about 8 seconds The current zone number will appear in the display Release the button 2 Find your current location on the zone map Refer to the illustration 3 Pressthe orthe A button repeat edly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the dis play Once you have selected a zone num ber the display will show a compass direc tion within a few seconds WIC0355 2 8 Instruments and controls Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct direction is not shown follow this procedure 1 With the display turned on press and hold the button for about 13 seconds or the A for about 10 seconds The C icon in the compass display will illuminate 2 Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h 3 After completing the circles the display should return to normal A CAUTION e Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass e When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Instruments and controls 2 9 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti lock Braking S
482. ontact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 57 When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag
483. onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM AWARNING e Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from mov ing backward on a hill Always drive carefully and attentively Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may re sult in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death The hill start assist system is not de signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions Al ways be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury Starting and driving 5 31 The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the
484. or engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid PUSH STARTING ACAUTION e CVT models cannot be push started or tow started Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS AWARNING e Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire e To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator or coolant reser voir cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury e Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumination of the engine oil pressure engine coolant temperature high indicator light or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector
485. osition only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift se lector button pushed in to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving L Low Use this position for engine braking on steep downhill gradients climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends Do not use the L Low position in any other circumstances LSD2128 Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift selector button pushed To move the shift selector perform the following procedure 1 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lock release cover A us ing a suitable tool 4 Push down the shift lock release B using a suitable tool 5 Press the shift selector button and move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release T
486. ot removed within 15 seconds or the amp button is pressed again during the eject sequence the entire disc eject sequence will be can celed When this button is pressed while a compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played CD IN indicator The slot numbers 1 6 will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only AUX IN jack The AUX IN jack is located on the CD changer The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan dard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 wo 000000 N FMAM pisc AUX SCAN ADM 15 CAT TRACK A WHA1364 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 1 CD eject button 6 TRACK button 2 VOL ON OFF control knob 7 SEEK CAT button 3 Station select 1 6 buttons 8 DISC button 4 TUNE FOLDER and AUDIO control 9 RPT RDM button 1 1 knob Bass Treble Fade and Balance 0 SCAN button 5 AUX button 1 FM AM button 4 80 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems No satellite radio reception is available when the AUX button is pressed to ac cess Satellite radio stations unless op tional satellite receiver and antenna are install
487. ot use wax on the camera lens Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a mild detergent diluted with water VENTS LHA2480 Adjust air flow direction for the driver s and pas Open or close the vents using the dial Move the senger s side vents center vents and rear dialtowardthe 3 to open the vents or toward vents 3 by moving the vent slide and or vent the M assemblies to close them Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic Type A OOP ON N Type A Temperature control buttons driver s 9 side AUTO climate control ON button 10 WY front defroster button 11 SS Air recirculation button MODE manual air flow control button Temperature control buttons passen ger s side DUAL passenger side temperature control ON OFF button REAR button LHA2472 fan speed control dial ON OFF button GY rear window defroster button A C air conditioner ON OFF button 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AWARNING e The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot
488. ou will not be using the remote control for long periods of time remove the bat teries Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at extremely close distances to the Dual Head Restraint DVD System or when it does not function at all FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This de vice may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device BEFORE OPERATING DUAL HEAD RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM Precautions Start the engine when using the Dual Head Re straint DVD System AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the Dual Head Restraint DVD System or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation ACAUTION e Only operate the Dual Head Restraint DVD System while the vehicle engine is running Operating the Dual Head Re straint DVD System for extended peri ods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery 4 120 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moi
489. ough they may in flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera tion The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor and the Air bag Control Unit ACU Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger the occupant classification sensors are also monitored Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight de tected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illumi nated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also c
490. ound electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system if so equipped in the Maintenance and do it yourself section later in this manual e Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing O Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off 2 12 Instruments and controls Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears in the vehicle information display When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at
491. ously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight This can occur even if the vehicle is parked Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already un buckled release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool such as a knife or scissors to release the seat belt 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5 LRS2148 Front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section WRS0137 WRS0138 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage e The retractor is designed to lock dur ing a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re tractor Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR e Automatic Locking Retra
492. ow the prompts Do not add a 1 in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers If the system does not recognize your com mand please try repeating the command using a natural voice Speaking too slowly or too loudly may further decrease recognition performance LHA2479 Voice Recognition 8 00 E 44 Phone Navigation 4 Information 4 Audio 4 Help To exit hold the TALK switch Pracie LHA1333 Voice Recognition gt Phone Yall 8 00 Phone E 44 Dial Number 49 Vehicle Phonebook 4 Handset Phonebook 4 Call History 4 Intemational Call To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1334 Example 2 Placing an international call to the phone number 011 81 111 222 3333 1 Pressthe button located on the steer ing wheel 2 The system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Au dio or Help 3 Say Phone 4 Say International Call Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 163 Voice Recognition gt Internatio Yul 8 00 a International Call Manual Controls Say the entire number or groups of numbers Say 0 9 pound star or plus To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1339 Voice Recognition gt Internatio Yul 8 00
493. ow to operate multiple sources 1 Display a video file in the front display by selecting the DVD mode 2 Press the L side on the power ON OFF button on the remote controller The left rear display comes on and the DVD screen will be displayed 3 Press the R side on the power ON OFF button on the remote controller The right rear display comes on and the DVD screen will be displayed 4 Switch the source on the front display to an audio source The sound from the speakers switches according to the front display The rear display continues to display the DVD 5 Turn on a pair of headphones and listen to the DVD on the rear displays using the head phones Connect an auxiliary device into the AUX jacks and push the AUX L or AUX R button on the remote controller The se lected side of the rear display turns to the AUX mode The other rear display continues to display the DVD Turn on the other pair of headphones If the sound from the headphones is not from the AUX jacks switch the channel with the channel select switch on the headphones CARE AND MAINTENANCE Use a lightly dampened lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your Dual Head Restraint DVD Sys tem DVD player face screen remote controller etc ACAUTION e Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system e Do not use excessive force on the moni tor screen 4 126 Monitor climate audio phone and
494. pending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone indicator light will illuminate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland Hawaii e Alaska After selection settings press the BACK button or any other mode button to accept the changes Settings gt Others 8 00 Comfort Language amp Units Voice Recognition Camera Image Viewer 1 5 Adjust comfort amp convenience settings LHA1248 Settings gt Comfort 8 00 Auto Interior Illumination ON Light Sensitivity C tessi gt Light Off Delay E 45 sec gt gt ON eon 1 9 Ig Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Selective Door Unlock Cabin lighting when unlocking doors LHA1246 Others settings Select the Others key using the NISSAN con troller Voice recognition language and units set ting screen will be displayed Comfort settings Select the Others key using the NISSAN con troller then select the Comfort key The Com fort settings screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the NISSAN controller The indicator light box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the item is touched o
495. pending on the driving condition The 4WD mode indicator light does not illuminate 2 The LOCK mode will change to the AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been driven at a high speed The 4WD LOCK indicator light turns off 3 The LOCK mode will automatically be cancelled when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position LSD2129 AWD shift tips f the 4WD mode switch is operated while making a turn accelerating or decelerating or if the ignition switch is turned off while in the AUTO or LOCK mode you may feel a jolt This is normal The oil temperature of power train parts will increase if the vehicle is continuously oper ated under conditions where the difference between the front and rear wheels is large wheel slip such as when driving the ve hicle on rough roads through sand or mud or when freeing a stuck vehicle In these cases the 4WD warning light blinks rapidly and the 4WD mode changes to the 2WD mode to protect the power train parts If you stop driving with the engine idling and wait until the warning light stops blinking the 4WD returns to the AUTO mode Brake distance in the 4WD mode is the same as 2WD Starting and driving 5 23 A CAUTION e Depending on the driving condition the 4WD mode may automatically change from 2WD to 4WD even when the 2WD mode is selected If this occurs while driving the 4WD mode indicator light will not illuminate e Do not start th
496. pends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary LDI2143 CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag ACAUTION e Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and en gine damage The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait
497. playing when the FM AM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception XM band select Pressing the AUX button will change the band as follows USB XM1 XM2 XM3 AUX USB satellite if so equipped When the AUX button is pressed while the igni tion switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the AUX button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left a lt Ppl SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons Press the SEEK CAT M4 button or the TRACK gt button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station
498. pplemental restraint system Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park LRS2131 Seat lifter driver s seat Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion LRS2132 Manual if so equipped Lumbar support driver s seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver Move the lever up or down manual or push the front or back end of the switch power to adjust the seat lumbar area Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 LRS2133 Power if so equipped LRS2143 Outboard seats 2ND ROW BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward Pull the center of the bar Q up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the
499. ppropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG Ensure that the command format is valid see Standard Mode command list or Alternate Command Mode command list in this NIZED or the system fails to interpret section the command correctly Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized The system consistently selects the 1 Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation wrong voicetag in the phonebook System in this section 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag 4 174 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems MEMO Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 175 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 0 4 5 2 Three way catalyst 0 0 0 cece eee eee 5 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 On pavement and off road driving PFECAUTIONS eroe ctu a An E ERE 5 6 Avoiding collision and
500. pty Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield washer fluid reser voir Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water LIC2398 If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor If this occurs turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow etc on and around the wiper arms After about 1 minute turn the switch ON again to operate the wiper The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to oper ate the wiper Intermittent INT intermittent operation not adjustable Low ON continuous low speed opera tion Push the switch forward to operate the washer Then the wiper will also operate several times REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH Gy O WIC1554 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch o
501. r about 2 seconds The indicator light will flash twice and then the intake air will be controlled automatically Air flow control Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet e Air flows from center and side vents 474 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets Air flows from defroster and foot outlets Air flows from defroster outlets Rear Air conditioning LHA2168 Rear automatic air conditioning system To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel press the REAR button When the rear automatic air conditioning system control is on the indicator light on the REAR button will illumi nate and the front display will switch to the rear air conditioner screen The rear automatic air conditioning system can be adjusted with the front air conditioner control panel when the rear air conditioner screen is displayed To adjust the front air conditioning system press the REAR button one more time 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Automatic operation 1 Press the AUTO button The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and AUTO will appear on the display 2 Turn the temperature control dial driver s side to set the desired temperature Manual operation e Temperature control Press the temper
502. r of the vehicle moves closer to an object ACAUTION e The turn signal light may look like the side of vehicle line This is not a malfunction Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES LHA1199 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill the dis tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor LHA1200 Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance For example the display shows 8 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA1201 LHA2548 LHA1202 Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines do not touch the object in the display However the vehicle ma
503. r speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Settings menu The content of the Settings Menu differs when the system is in the Alternate Command Mode Command List Displays the command list for Alternate Com mand Mode User Guide The user guide provides basic instructions for using Voice Recognition and accessing some voice commands NOTE The user guide can also be accessed from within the INFO menu after pressing the INFO button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 171 Speaker Adaptation Starts a system training procedure to learn the specific sounds of your voice See Speaker ad aptation function in this section Alternate Command Mode For advanced operation an Alternate Command Mode is provided This setting enables control of the audio system as well as additional commands for the Phone and Navigation systems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the available commands at each step When this mode is activated the Voice Recogni tion Settings will change to show more options Minimize Voice Feedback Reduces the amount of the information spoken for each voice instruction Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 00 Command List User Guide Speaker Adaptation Al
504. r and washer SWICHES scos 5 BR p ea doe Sem a 2 30 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 29 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 8 Wheels andtires 20005 8 30 Wheel tire size 0 ee ee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country 2 2 eee eee 9 9 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 52 Power rear windows 2 52 Power windows 004 2 51 Rear power windows 2 52 Windshield washer fluid 8 13 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 29 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer sWitcheS s 24 sca ca eRe eS 2 30 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 29 Wiper blades svs s esn nab eae 8 19 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 ACAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 15 or E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 15 or E 85 fuel Using E 15 or E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 15 or E 85 fuel can ad versely affect the emission control de vices and systems of the vehicle Dam age caused by suc
505. r fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability e Clean the filler cap before removing e Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LDI2147 LDI2192 Check the fluid level in the reservoir If the brake fluid is below the MIN line the brake warning light will illuminate Add brake fluid up to the MAX line See RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES in the Technical and consumer information section for the recommended type of brake fluid If the brake fluid must be added frequently the brake system should be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir periodi cally Add windshield washer fluid when the low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on To fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield washer fluid into the reservoir opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions
506. r phones that do not support automatic down load of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth pro file the Phonebook command is used to manu ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B Transfer Entry Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 135 Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link
507. r questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference in cluding interference that
508. r the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 8 00 ON Q ao ON Settings gt Comfort Selective Door Unlock Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Lift Steering Wheel on Exit ON 5 9 Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit i Return All Settings to Default Off will activate all doors with one click LHA1247 Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Light Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left After selecting the item turn the NISSAN controller or touch the or key to change the setting Light Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer After select ing the item turn the NISSAN controller or touch the or key to change the setting The available delays are O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 seconds Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according to the vehicle speed Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the
509. r vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intel ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System components As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be regis tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im mobilizer System of your vehicle Since the reg istration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object
510. rain front seat occu pants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system See SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT in this section for more de tails If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 63 When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual LRS2158 LRSO100 1 SRS Air Bag Warning Labels The warning labels are located on the sur face of the sun visor SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration 1 64 Safety
511. reen Setting keys Select the Settings key with the NISSAN con troller and press the ENTER button to adjust the following settings The items indicated with can also be set from the rear display Press the DVD button on the remote controller while a DVD is being played Select the preferred item using the joystick on the remote controller and press the ENTER button Key DVD VIDEO Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed Arrow icons Move the cursor to select a DVD menu Enter Enter the selected menu Move Change the display location by moving the operation key Back Return to the previous screen Hide Hide the operation key Title Menu front Menu rear DVD VIDEO Menus specific to each disc will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the disc Title Search DVD VIDEO A scene that belongs to a specified title will be displayed each time the side or side is selected 10 Key Search DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CDDA Select the 10 Key Search key and press the ENTER button to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key with the NISSAN controller Then press the ENTER button The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 123 Angle DVD VIDEO If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the curr
512. require an increased amount of windshield washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent ACAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for windshield washer fluid This may result in damage to the paint e Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield washer fluid reser voir Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened Ifthe vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge NOTE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no start conditions such as 1 Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running Phone chargers GPS DVD play
513. reused Replace the air cleaner filter according to the maintenance log shown in the Warranty Informa tion and Maintenance Booklet To remove the air cleaner filter Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward Remove the air cleaner filter and wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself NOTE After installing a new air cleaner make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips AWARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed e Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the w
514. rface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter in this section e Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly e Check your local regulations AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 6 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity de
515. rgy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters
516. riting to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov 9 30 Technical and consumer information You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN If Transport Canada receives complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may requ
517. rmation regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation ee eee eee 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 5 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations cece eee e eens 9 6 Specifications sew eecinginsaeiay one e a danke 9 7 ENGNG ys ccc sual aed ti parciane aces hae Fealepaleneauaaoe seus 9 7 Wheels and tires cscccccss4 eccsatexsvainetveay 9 8 Dimensions and weights 00 sees eee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in ANOTHSK COUMUY wants sciatica e Sie Berke adh e ESEE dastati 9 9 Vehicle identification eee e eee eee eee eee 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle ide
518. roll over Always back straight down in R Reverse gear and apply brakes to control your speed Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade resulting in loss of control and an acci dent Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain Prop erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack and evenly distribute the load Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible Do not equip the ve hicle with tires larger than specified in this manual This could cause your ve hicle to roll over Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off road The steering wheel could move sud denly and injure your hands Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim Before operating the vehicle ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds With a higher center of gravity your NISSAN is more af fected by strong side winds Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control e Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires even with 4WD engaged For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheel
519. roller to choose an item on the display screen Highlight an item on the dis play using the main directional buttons cer tain Navigation System functions use the addi tional directional buttons or the center dial Then press the ENTER button C to select the item or perform the action The BACK button has two functions Go back to the previous display cancel If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup For the VOICE button 8 functions refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN A CAUTION e The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass screen breaks do not touch it Doing so could result in an injury To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel e Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To help ensure safe driving some functions can not be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicle in a safe location
520. rollover 00008 5 6 Off road r GOVe rcas Ten casaiganiiies bee petai 5 7 Rapid air pressure l0SS ouou 00 cece eee eee 5 7 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 8 Driving safety precautions 00 00 5 8 Push Button Ignition Switch 05 5 10 Operating ange soso see taneeteue denen ceenwe 5 11 Push button ignition switch positions 5 11 Emergency engine shut off 0 008 5 12 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge 5 12 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 5 13 Before starting the engine 000ecce eee eee 5 13 Starting the engine cc ee eee eee ee 5 13 Remote start if so equipped eee 5 14 Driving the vehicle 5 00 00 cece eee 5 14 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 14 Parking brak s ci0cisesaecddseedinsae cant etek 5 18 Cruise GONO errori iswkenetanevarsaneiwtaceesete 5 19 Precautions on cruise control 0 008 5 19 Cruise control operations 05 5 19 Break In schedule cc coetactee ance Fone arate een 5 20 Fuel efficient driving tips 0 cece eee eee ee 5 21 Increasing fuel economy 00 c eee eee 5 22 Intelligent 4WD if so equipped eee eee 5 22 4x4i system operation 00 cece eee eee 5 22 Parking parking on hills 00 e cece eee eee 5 25 Power Steering i scecscnneteinnw
521. roperly See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section HEAD RESTRAINTS 1st row only AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head resiraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision LRS2134 The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints The first row head restraints are adjustable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 4 2 3 LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888 Components Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level Adjustment notches with the center of the seat occupant s ears 1 2 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and suppleme
522. rs Technical and consumer information 9 23 Trailer brakes When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used However most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking sys tems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module If electric trailer brakes are used see Electric trailer brake controller in this section Have a professional supplier of towing equip ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing 9 24 Technical and consumer information AWARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system WL A LT10117 example
523. rted only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off ACAUTION e Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down e Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid e Never leave the engine or continuously variable transmission related compo nent harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position e Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 E NGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS NS A gt a M MT ab i C RE de
524. rting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open e When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet Instruments and controls 2 43 LIC2407 2nd Row 120V OUTLET if so equipped A CAUTION e The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use e Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery e Do not use double adaptors or more than one electrical accessory 2 44 Instruments and controls Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet STORAGE MAP POCKETS LIC2392 Front Console LIC2232 LIC2312 SEATBACK POCKETS There are two seatback pockets located on the back of the driver and passenger seats The pockets can be used to store maps SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglas
525. rub the material with a cloth Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread e Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar chemical to clean the suede This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth damp ened in warm water Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth damp ened in warm water Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry FLOOR MATS AWARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury e NEVER place a floor mat on top of an other floor mat in the driver front position e Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your ve hicle model See your NISSAN dealer for more information Properly position the mats in the floor well using the floor mat positioning aid See Floor mat positioning aid in this section The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior Mats should be main tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn Bracket LAI2002 LAI2003 Bracket positions Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle inc
526. ry in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision LRS2136 LRS2073 t 4p P LRS2074 The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints The third row head restraints do not adjust but are removable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint m Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Components 1 Head restraint 2 Lock knobs 3 Stalks Removal Use the following procedure to remove the head restraints 1 Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary 2 Push and hold both lock knobs 3 Pull the head restraint up until it is removed from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall the head restraint to the locking position and properly adjust the s
527. s play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Comfort key Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Auto Interior Illu mination etc Up Down Movement Indicator Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move up or down on the screen and select more options Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for the current menu even if they are on multiple pages for example 1 9 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON The STATUS button is used to display system infor mation Three different split screens of information are available Press the STATUS button multiple times to cycle through these screens as follows Audio with Turn Information for Navigation Audio with Fuel Economy Information Audio with Climate Control Information Audio with Turn Information for Navigation 8 00 Information Fuel Economy Weather Info Mai
528. s at the rear of the center console The rear control buttons do not function when the rear air conditioner screen is shown on the front display To activate the rear control buttons press the REAR button on the front air condi tioner control panel and switch the screen on the front display OFF button Turns rear automatic air conditioning system off Fan speed increase and decrease buttons Ad justs the rear fan speed up or down AUTO button Turns rear automatic air condition ing system on AUTO mode on Temperature increase and decrease buttons Ad justs the rear temperature up or down Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 To turn system off Press the OFF button OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally VAAD amp LHA2473 The sunload sensor located on the top driver s side of the instrument panel helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put any thing on or around this sensor 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with th
529. s away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite r
530. s do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself NOTE Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no start conditions such as 1 In stallation or extended use of electronic ac cessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running Phone chargers GPS DVD players etc 2 Vehicle is not driven regularly and or only driven short dis tances In these cases the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the
531. s in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with 9 32 Technical and consumer information the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source
532. s not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW USB 2 0 CD CD R CD RW ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet 1SO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista operating system based Supported file systems computer are not supported VDF 1 5 VDF 2 0 packet writing is not supported MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 2 versions WMA7 WMA8 Bkz 48 k Kops 320 kops VER Tag infi tion S titl Grist ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER 2 4 MP3 only ag information Song title and artist name WMA tag WMA only OSES tag WMA only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 64 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 LE 04 UNICODE UTF 16 BE 05 UNI Displayable character codes 3 CODE UTF 8 1 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 2 When VBR files are played the playback time may
533. s off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury Accelerating quickly sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control If at all possible avoid sharp turning maneuvers particularly at high speeds Your NISSAN four wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car The vehicle is not de signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully Be sure to check the brakes immedi ately after driving in mud or water See Brake system later in this section for Wet brakes
534. s originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phonebook in this section 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book 4 140 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Ifyou are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine microphone location LHA2477 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con necting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle Mon
535. s when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator illuminates replace the battery with a new one See Battery replacement in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally If this appears touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal For more information see Intelligent Key battery discharge in the Starting and driving section Release Parking brake This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven Low Fuel This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches O Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 Empty Low Washer Fluid This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Instruments and controls 2 25 Door Open This warning illuminates when a door has been opened when the engine is running Liftgate open
536. sation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Cannot play Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA AAC M4A or AA3 cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of charac ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ ing application or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the CD DVD USB device is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the CD DVD is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD DVD USB device or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts before the music starts playing playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing
537. se the preferred play mode PG PL Mode DVD VR Choose from the PG or PL mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 LHA2475 USB INTERFACE models without Navigation System if so equipped Connecting a device to the USB input jack A CAUTION Depending on size and shape of USB device the console lid may not fully close Do not force console lid closed as this may damage USB device e Do not force the USB device into the USB port Inserting the USB device tilted or up side down into the port may damage the USB device and the port Make sure that the USB device is con nected correctly into the USB port Some USB devices come witha Y mark as a guide Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be fore inserting the device Do not locate objects near the USB de vice to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB device and the port Pres sure from the objects may damage the USB device and the port The USB input jack is located in the center con sole Insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio files on the stor age device can be played through the vehicle s audio system Audio file operation AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is playing and a USB memory de
538. sedtSs ss oog aun a ee es 1 46 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 27 Brake fluid wc ty e a nE a 8 12 Brake light See stop light 8 27 Brake system ea ct erenn Esak 5 27 Brake warning light oaaao 2 11 Brake wear indicators 2 17 8 20 Parking brake operation 5 18 Self adjusting brakes annaa 8 20 Brakes a asin aks p ia pom ate ER 8 20 Break in schedule 004 5 20 Brightness contrast button 4 15 4 30 Brightness control Instrument panel noaa 0 0000 2 35 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement 0004 8 27 c Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants aaa 9 2 Gargo light a os 4 ani A eo ee a4 2 58 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 13 Car phone or CBradio 4 127 CD care andcleaning 4 111 CD changer See audio system 4 77 CD player See audio system 4 83 4 91 Check tire pressure o an anaana 2 26 Child restraints 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 32 Precautions on child restraints 1 30 1 37 1 41 1 46 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 34 Child restraint with top tether strap 1 34 Child safety reardoorlock 3 7 Chimes audible reminders 2 17 Cleaning exterior and interior 2 2 2 7 2 Clock models with navigation system 4 11 4 26 Glock set u bird e aoh haa ae d 4 11 4 26 C M V S S certification label
539. ses holder push and release Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder AWARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident ACAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses e Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses Instruments and controls 2 45 LIC2387 LIC2395 LIC2212 Front console Rear door Bench seat Do not recline the rear seatback when you use the cup holders on the rear armrest Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over and if they are hot they may scald the passengers 2 46 Instruments and controls LIC2242 3rd row A CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident LIC2393 Bottle holder front ACAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers LIC2394 Bottle holder rear Instruments and controls 2 47 LIC2243 WIC1120 LICO702 GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key when
540. side of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Sit upright and well back ARS1133 ARS1041 AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 51 at belts and supplemental restraint system 1 52 Safety Seats se e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously in jure or kill your child See Child re straints earlier in this section for details ARS1045 ARS1046 AWARNING e Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly re strained Pre teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 53 WRS0431 SSS0162 SSS0159 AWARNING Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags The side air bags
541. sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 7 H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire P215 65R15 95H speed rating 15 t WDI0395 Example Tire size example P215 65R15 95H 4 R The R stands for radial 1 P The P indicates the tire is de 5 Two digit number 15 This number signed for passenger vehicles not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches tires have this information 6 Two or three digit number 95 This 2 Three digit number 215 This num number is the tire s load index It is a ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wall edge 3 Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law XX XX t t 2 3 t 4 Example TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or
542. sioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance The ignition switch should al ways be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle AWARNING e Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Addition ally the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired The front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incor rect disposal procedures could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 65 2 Instruments and controls
543. sition using the large switch 3 34 Pre driving checks and adjustments AWARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects Do not adjust the mirrors while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident LPD2112 Manual folding outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it Reverse tilt down feature if so equipped The reverse tilt down feature will turn the se lected outside mirror surface downward to pro vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle When the ignition switch is in the ON position turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or right position Only one mirror can be selected at a time Move the shift selector to R Reverse The se lected mirror will turn downward The selected mirror surface will return to its origi nal position when any of the following have oc curred The shift selector is moved to any position other than R Reverse The outside mirror control switch is set to the neutral or center position The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position NOTE If the outside mirror control switch is in the neutral position neither mirror will turn downward when the shi
544. snow or ice the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor If this occurs turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms In approximately 1 minute turn the switch on again to operate the wiper WIC1434 SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed Intermittent INT intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward Slower or Faster Also the inter mittent operation speed varies in accor dance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermit tent operation speed will be faster Instruments and controls 2 29 _ Low LO continuous low speed operation High HI continuous high speed opera tion Push the lever up to have one sweep opera tion MIST of the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times 2 30 Instruments and controls REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the window and ob scure your vision Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds e Do not operate the washer if the reser voir is em
545. so that the predicted course lines enter the parking space 4 Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space When the back of the vehicle enters the parking space maneu ver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space 5 When the vehicle is parked in the space completely move the shift lever to the P Park position and apply the parking brake DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects 4 36 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA1199 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill the dis tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor LHA1200 Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are show
546. speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by copyright protection the next song when playing player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device Music cuts off or skips 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Compressed Video Files models with Navigation System Explanation of terms DivX DivX refers to the DivX codec owned by Div Inc used for a lossy compres sion of video based on MPEG 4 e AVI AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave It is standard file format originated by Micro soft Corporation A divx encoded file can be saved into the avi file format for playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this section However all avi files are not playable on this system since different encodings can be used other than the DivX codec e ASF ASF stands for Advanced Systems Format It is a file format owned by Microsoft Corporation Note Only asf files that meet the requirements stated in
547. speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated For additional information see Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal function For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section in this manual AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electrical medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manu facturer for the possible influences be fore use e If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position have the vehicle chec
548. stalled for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed e Only touch the base when handling the bulb Never touch the glass envelope Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and or headlight performance e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped e Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer FOG LIGHTS if so equipped Replacing the fog light bulb If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer A CAUTION e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped e When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust mois ture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light EXTE
549. straint contacts the instru ment panel If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel the sys tem may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate See Child restraints earlier in this sec tion for information about installing and using child restraints Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light e If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as de scribed later in this section please take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer to check the occupant classification system Until you have confirmed with your dealer that your passenger seat occu pant classification system is working properly position the occupants in the rear seating positions This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions alth
550. sture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction e While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee com plete functionality of all VIDEO CD formats Parental level parental control Video data with the parental control setting can be played with this system Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system Disc selection You can play the following disc formats with the DVD player e DVD VIDEO e VIDEO CD e DTS CD Use DVDs with the region code ALL or the code applicable to your country The region code is displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player can only play DVDs with an applicable region code Available audio sources The following sources are available to play on each display Front display Radio e CD DVD e USB memory iPod Bluetooth audio AUX front Rear display e DVD e USB memory with video files AUX front rear Settings 7 Top Menu SAA3069 Front display DVD 01 002 00 12 28 C Cen A B PLAY SKIP D E STOP l SKIP C l CM F l CM SAA3082 Rear display PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD DISC AUX button Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD player while watching the images Insert a DVD into the CD DVD slot with the labeled side up The DVD will be guided auto mati
551. sudden stop Properly secure all cargo to help pre vent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 19 LRS2144 Folding the 2nd row bench seat To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling 1 Make sure that the head restraints are low ered For maximum cargo hauling remove the center head rest To remove the head rest push and hold the lock knob while moving the head rest in an upward direction Store the head rest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt hooks found on the sides of the vehicle 3 Lift up on the recline lever on the side of the outboard seats to fold the seatbacks flat 4 To return the 2nd row bench seats to a seating position push up on the seatback until it latches in place 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2145 Folding the 3rd row seats To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo capacity 1 Pull the strap to release the head re straint forward Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat belt hooks 4 found on the sides of the cargo area Pull up on the latch located in the upper corner of each seatback and lower the seat back forward over the seat base To
552. sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and or dehumidified heating AUTO This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Press the AUTO button on The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed 2 Operate the driver s side temperature con trol buttons Adjust the temperature display to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con trolled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction 3 You can individually set driver s and front passenger s side temperature using each temperature control button When the DUAL button or passenger s side temperature but ton is pressed the DUAL indicator will come on To turn off the passenger s side tempera ture control press the DUAL button
553. system 1 Switch the vehicle ignition to the ACCES SORY or RUN mode 2 Press and hold the sunshade close switch 3 Sunshade will begin moving towards the close position only while the switch is con tinually pressed this disables the obstacle detection 4 Sunshade will stop for about 4 seconds 2 56 Instruments and controls 5 Sunshade drive cable will travel in the open direction for 394 in 10 mm than reverse direction and stop at the normal close posi tion 6 Release the sunshade close switch Initial ization procedure is complete If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above have your ve hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Auto reverse function when closing the sunshade The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunshade is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunshade occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all of the passengers have their hands etc in side the vehicle before closing the sunshade INTERIOR LIGHT Q LIC2302 When the ON switch Q is pressed
554. t hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 15 fuel E 15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15 fuel ethanol and 85 unleaded gasoline E 15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E 15 fuel Do not use E 15 in your vehicle U S gov ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens ing pumps to be identified with small square 9 4 Technical and consumer information orange and black label with the common abbre viation or the appropriate percentage for that region E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel syst
555. t is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this period of time the power to the windows is canceled LIC2396 DARN Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side automatic switch Right rear passenger side Left rear passenger side Driver side automatic switch Instruments and controls 2 51 Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows To open a window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the de sired window position is reached To close a window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function 2 52 Instruments and controls LIC
556. t of the vehicle except the attachment point If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifi cally for vehicle recovery Always follow the manufacturer s instructions for the recovery de vice Do not use the tie down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery Rocking a stuck vehicle AWARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System VDC 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires 4 Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH 55 km h 5 If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle In case of emergency 6 15 MEMO 6 16 Incase of emergency 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior 00 cece cece ete ees 7 2 Moonroof if so equipped 6
557. tart the engine 3 Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least one second to operate the automatic drive positioner 4 Turn the outside mirror control switch to L Left 5 Depress the brake pedal 6 Move the shift selector to R Reverse 7 Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po sition for backing up by operating the out side mirror control switch 8 Push the SET switch and within five sec onds push the memory switch 1 or 2 se lected in step 3 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately five seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the selected mirror position is stored in the se lected memory 1 or 2 9 Turn the outside mirror control switch to R Right Repeat the above procedure to ad just the right mirror position and store in the selected memory When the driver s seat and outside mirrors are not in the memorized position the out side mirror will move with the initial tilt down angle Seat synchronization function The seat synchronization function automatically adjusts the positions of the steering wheel and outside mirrors when the seat is adjusted using the power seat switches However the steering wheel and outside mirrors will not move if the seat is adjusted over the maximum thresholds The system considers that the steering wheel and outside mirror adjust ments are not necessary because t
558. tch 008 2 32 Headlight control switch 0 0 esses 2 32 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 34 Instrument brightness control 008 2 35 Turnisignal SWItCR ts ccoateneciaies saan tes 2 35 Fog light switch if so equipped 5 2 36 FH ODUM cites tek arte det Sled rides ste hen datk tubs Beng E an dene hatin 2 37 Heated seats if so equipped cece eee ee 2 37 Heated rear seats if so equipped 0 00 2 38 Heated steering wheel if so equipped 2 39 Climate controlled seat switch if so equipped 2 40 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off switch 2 41 Power inverter switch if so equipped 2 41 Tow mode Switch 20s seis vided eor iad dak 2 42 POWER OUTS TS sch iia at dou site dagen te bra ia anal ES 2 42 DAW OUTCLS eine eat Seach as ammnardotedens 2 42 120v outlet if so equipped eee eee 2 44 SOG iv rigineeriweaeinent gee dee 2 44 Map pockets sce cccccd cidade neds tieee wenn 2 44 Seatback pocketSivadecunaend i kadets enuia eita 2 45 Sunglasses holders rinis iniia teno eia 2 45 Cup Molde i e dake tans a npn a E EE 2 46 GIOVE DOK 45 i E E al 2 48 Console box iseidendete eves cane abadi 2 48 Storage tray cera iviatians witsans wena eeeaetad 2 49 Luggage hOokSisi uesisaee seeded isoienisawi 2 49 Cargo area storage bin 0 00 000e 2 50 Roof rack if so equipped 0 e
559. tems later in this section R Slip indicator light This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits You may feel or hear the system working this is normal The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin The indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec onds if the system is operational If the light does not come on have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Tow mode ON indicator light if so equipped This light comes on when the tow mode function is ON Turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on 8 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys tem is not operating Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The
560. ter in this section ABS Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the anti lock braking sys tem is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion BRAKE or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer AWARNING e Your brake syste
561. ternate Command Mode Minimize Voice Feedback Change the mode of Voice Recognition LHA1341 8 00 e Settings gt Speaker Adaptation User 1 None User 2 None User 3 None IS 1 3 Learning result can be stored deleted edited LHA1346 SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION The Voice Recognition system has a function to learn the user s voice for better voice recognition performance The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons Having the system learn the user s voice 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel select the Others key on the display 2 Select the Voice Recognition key 3 Select the Speaker Adaptation key 4 172 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 Select the user whose voice is to be memo rized by the system 8 00 Ko Settings gt Speaker Adaptation Setting User 1 Start Speaker Adaptation Learning S 1 2 Push the ENTER switch to select LHA1347 Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 2S FM Changes the source of the audio system to FM Alternate Command Mode ON To exit hold the TALK switch LHA2457 8 00 Ko Settings gt Speaker Adaptation Edit Name User 1 Reset Result Continuous Learning ON S
562. th a USB device is rec ommended General notes for USB use The USB device may not function when the passenger compartment temperature is ex tremely high Lower the temperature before If the cable is damaged insulation cut con nectors cracked contamination such as liq uids dust dirt etc in the connectors do not use the cable Replace the cable with a new one Do not put a USB device in a location where static electricity occurs electrical noise is generated or hot air from the air conditioner blows directly on it Doing so may cause the data stored on the USB device to be cor rupted An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod nano 2nd Generation Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod The vehicle center display may mo mentarily black out but will soon recover If an iPod automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode the vehicle center display may momentarily black out Notes for iPod use but will soon recover use Bluetooth streaming audio if so equipped Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in During cold weather or rainy days the player the S and other countries may malfunction due to humidity If this oc curs remove the USB device and dehumidify Improperly pluggi
563. th liquid will cause the system to malfunction When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown on the display These keys can only be selected using the NISSAN controller LHA2470 HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on the display screen Highlight an item on the dis play using the main directional buttons or the center dial Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action The BACK button has two functions Go back to the previous display cancel If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 1 2 3 _ EE ESettings gt Time Zone 8 0 UP a Pacific o ON g Mountain o ON E Z Central o ON F Eastern o ON E E Atlantic o ON 2 IMi 173 Bown Manually set the time zone
564. the engine is not running for an extended pe riod This can discharge the battery EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1 5 seconds or Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds 5 12 Starting and driving SSD0860 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation start the engine according to the following procedure 1 Place the shift selector in the P Park posi tion 2 Firmly apply the foot brake 3 Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated A chime will sound After step 3 is performed when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal the ignition switch position will change to ACC 4 Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds The engine will start NOTE When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle This is not a malfunction To turn off the Intelligent K
565. the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters 0 Empty Instruments and controls 2 5 The W indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION If the vehicle runs out of fuel the C Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the L light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the ve hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer e For additional information see Mal function Indicator Light MIL later in this section 2 6 Instruments and controls COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in dicates the heading direction of the vehicle With the ignition switch in the ON position press the or button as described in the charts below to activate various features of the automatic anti glare rearview mirror Type A Push and hold Feature D Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Automatic anti glare indicator light 8 seconds toggles on off Compass zone can be changed to 11 seconds correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Type B Push and hold Feature the N Push button again for about 1
566. the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System After the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle ACAUTION Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect system function DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors AWARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders e Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents ORG Ou aS Po LPD0461 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at
567. the mode in the following sequence Models without Navigation System AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 satellite radio if so equipped USB iPod if so equipped CD DVD AUX AM Models with Navigation System AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 satellite radio if so equipped CD DVD USB iPod Bluetooth Audio AUX AM These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume v A Menu control switch ENTER button While the display is showing a MAP STATUS or Audio screen tilt the Menu Control switch up ward or downward to select a station track CD or folder For most audio sources tilting the switch up down for more than 1 5 seconds pro vides a different function than a tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds AM and FM Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station Press the ENTER button to show the list of preset stations XM if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to go to the next or previous category Press the ENTER button to show the XM Menu iPod if so equipped
568. the Intelligent Key door handle request switch if so equipped power door lock switch or mechanical key 4 Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security sys tem is now pre armed After about 30 sec onds the vehicle security system automati cally shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob or the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position the sys tem will not arm e Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will activate with all the doors hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position the system will be released Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after a pe riod of time However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door with the key or by pressing the A button on the Intelligent Key Instruments and controls 2 27 The alarm is activated by opening the door or hood without using the key or Intelligent Key even if the door is
569. the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 2 WRS0799 Forward facing web mounted step 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor WRS0800 Forward facing rigid mounted step 2 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is re moved See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LR
570. the driving operation 1 2 w a BRIGHT STATUS e Do not disassemble or modify this sys tem If you do it may result in accidents fire or electrical shock e Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock SETTING In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock LHA2469 1 STATUS button P 4 6 BRIGHT brightness control button 2 INFO button P 4 6 BRIGHT brightness control button 3 NISSAN controller P 4 5 gt BACK previous button P 4 5 SETTING button P 4 9 on oaa 4 S12 OFF brightness control button P 4 15 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A CAUTION The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass screen breaks do not touch it Doing so could result in an injury To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel e Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact wi
571. the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Key registration complete This appears when a new intelligent key is regis tered to the vehicle Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning if so equipped This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated If this warning appears stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pres sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Low tire pressure warning light ear lier in this section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section TPMS Error This warning appears when there is a error with your TPMS If this warning comes on have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Push to start if so equipped This warning appears in the vehicle information display when the vehicle has been started using the remote start function To start the vehicle apply the brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position Loose Fuel Cap This warning appears when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled See Fuel filler cap in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section of this ma
572. the roof side rails Cross bars must be installed before apply ing load cargo luggage to the roof of the vehicle Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or its Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F M V S S or C V M S S certification label lo cated on the driver s door pillar For more infor mation regarding GVWR and GAWR see Ve hicle loading information in the Technical and customer information section AWARNING e Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the cross bars e Heavy loading of the cross bars has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers e Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed e Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross bars load e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury A CAUTION Always install the cross bars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle s roof may cause ve hicle damage WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS AWARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while i
573. the touch screen to select items from the displayed video You may also use the NISSAN controller to select an item from the displayed video When the op eration screen is being shown use the NISSAN controller or the touchscreen to select an item from the displayed menus Lt PAUSE Select the Il key to pause the DVD To re sume playing the DVD use the key oi Select the P key to start playing the DVD or resume playing the DVD after it has been paused ii STOP Select the W key to stop playing the DVD PP P NEXT PREVIOUS CHAPTER Select the PI key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward Select the M4 key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will advance forward or backward the number of times the respective key is touched or selected with the NISSAN controller P CM SKIP This function is only for DVD VIDEO and DVD VR Selectthe I gt or l key to fast forward or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM settings For more information see DVD set tings in this section Top Menu When the Top Menu key is selected while the DVD is playing the top menu specific to each disc will be displayed For details see the instruc tions attached to the disc DVD settings Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings e Key DVD VIDEO Displays the operation keys for the specific DVD menu 4 96 Monitor climate audio phone a
574. the tow mode switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the instrument panel illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 2 42 Instruments and controls For additional information refer to Tow mode in the Technical and consumer information sec tion later in this manual POWER OUTLETS LIC2391 Instrument Panel 12V OUTLETS The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones They are rated at 12 volt 120W 10A maximum The front and center console power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position LIC2408 Center Console A CAUTION e The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use e Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your NISSAN dealer for additional information e Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw e Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory LIC2236 Cargo Area e Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery e Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on e Before inse
575. times to complete the training process HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device 7 lf you have any questions or are having diffi culty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio frequency laws require transmit ter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during training Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to tim eout in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Training procedures replace Programming HomeLink Step 2 with the fol lowing NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components 1 See Programing HomeLink step 1 earlier in this section 2 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button During train ing your hand held transmitter may auto matically stop transmitting Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitter every two sec
576. ting can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load js Tongue load Total trailer load Tongue load l A a x 100 10 to 15 WT10160 LTI2042 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib uting hitch keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu facturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow ing Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage h
577. tings of the vehicle information display For additional information see Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and con trols section of this manual The remote engine start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display For an explanation of the warning or indicator please see Vehicle information display warning and indica tors in the Instruments and controls section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 HOOD LPD2107 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments AWARNING Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood LIFTGATE AWARNING Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from open ing while driving Do not drive with the liftgate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Do not leave chil
578. tion Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star one two three Say plus for available only when using the Special Number command Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number NOTE For best results say phone numbers as single digits The voice command Help is available at any time Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system LHA2478 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel C PHONE SEND Press the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 131 You can also use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information Ca PHONE END While the voice recognition system is active press and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recognition system at any time TUNING SWITCH While using the voice recognition system tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to
579. to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed In case of emergency 6 11 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 12 Incase of emergency 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be fol
580. to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position it may be impos sible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones 4 142 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones If reception between callers is unclear ad justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity See Call volume in this section REGULATORY
581. to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 4 DOT XX XX XXX XXXX XXX XXX XXXX t t 5 6 WDI0396 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radi
582. ton to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Press the amp air recirculation button to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle The TS indicator light on the button will come on The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the Y front defrosting D mode orthe front defrosting and foot out let mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode the intake air will be con trolled automatically To manually control the in take air press the gt air recirculation button To return to the automatic control mode press and hold the VS air recirculation button for about 2 seconds The indicator light will flash twice and then the intake air will be controlled automatically Air flow control Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet s4 Air flows from center and side vents 474 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets 3 Air flows from defroster and foot outlets Air flows from defroster outlets g To turn system off Press the OFF button LHA2134 OFF button Fan speed increase button AUTO button Temperature increase A button Temperature decrease Y button Display Fan speed decrease button REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER
583. trol knob is not pressed for approxi mately 10 seconds the radio or CD display will automatically reappear Settings 8 00 Up Audio Display Switch Beeps Camera Clock SHOW ore LO Adjust tone amp advanced audio settings LHA1304 Settings gt Audio 8 0 E Sei iT Tee COMO Baance COM CO l Cr MM CE OG Speed Sensitive Vol LHA1314 Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5 press the SETTING button Then select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller the audio settings screen will be displayed Select the key or key to change the SSV While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the BACK button For information on how to use the NISSAN con troller see How to use the NISSAN controller in this section Clock operation For additional information on setting the clock see Adjusting the time in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 1 Im Root Folder AXXXXXXX 2 Big xxxxxx 3 Bm xxxxxx 0 28 4 Ep xxxxxx 5 E xxxxxx 1 DISC RPT MP3 ALA LAAL CEE C TO A 6 Bm xxxxxx WHA0949 CD gt Text Ee a XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Mp3 XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
584. turns to the call Send Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For ex ample if you were directed to dial an exten sion by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for Say pound for e Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session To reconnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free System press the button Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook Transfer Entry Delete Entry List Names Fo
585. two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 59 Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant ar
586. ull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park position Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s seat Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 A X o NF WRS0389 LRS2130 Lumbar support driver s seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner in Pre driving checks and adjustments for automatic drive po sitioner operation 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and su
587. under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change e Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support e Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary e Never use blocks on or under the jack e Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack e Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground LCE2048 LCE0087 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point The jack up points are
588. up arrow 3 to scroll up the page one item at a time or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page Touch the down arrow 8 to scroll down the page one item at a time or touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key 4 There are some options available when inputting characters e Uppercase Shows uppercase characters e Lowercase Shows lowercase characters Space Inserts a space o Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters e OK Completes the character input Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or de tergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen 1 2 3 emia gt Comfort 8 00 Saa Auto Interior Illumination eon E Light Sensitivity J to HCO Light Off Delay 4 45 sec gt l Speed Sensing Wiper Interval e oN Selective Door Unlock ONn je 1 9 Cabin lighting when unlocking doors 5 4 3 LHA1229 HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center di
589. ush the button to turn the map lights on To turn them off press the button again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three position switch To operate push the switch to the desired position ON The light is illuminated DOOR The light illuminates when the lift gate is opened The light turns off when the liftgate is closed OFF The light does not illuminate regardless of liftgate position or lock status A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Type A if so equipped LIC2363 The Type A system does not have an IV on the back of the mirror Move the mirror to see if the IV is present If the IV is not on the mirror use the procedure in this section to program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver If the IV is on the mirror use the procedure in HomeLink universal transceiver Type B if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver e Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity syst
590. ut Navigation System if so equipped 0 eee eee ee eee 4 98 USB interface models with Navigation SySteM sccee een sevaeeesceds ewe cue waved dees 4 99 iPod player operation without Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece e eee eee 4 103 iPod player operation with Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee eee Bluetooth streaming audio if so equipped CD care and cleaning 0 0000 Steering wheel switch for audio control AMENNA ire aeir rs ea n Ea EN Dual head restraint DVD system if so equipped System components 200eee ee eee Before operating dual head restraint DVD SV SUSI ai aaa a a a Leeann E eo ha ae Playing a digital versatile disc DVD Operating tips asragin eie Esan Care and maintenance 2 0005 Car phone or CB radio 0 0 002 eee eee Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System if so equipped 4 Regulatory Information c 0 seca ee Using the Syste Mies sorier pisie aoalelges ase kes Control B NONS s rascarse seman tanoa ENESE Getting Started sire cirie ietie rapain bees es 5 List of voice commands 0 e eee ee Voice Adaptation VA mode eee sees Manual contiol ossi 3 g0sc0 26 oe Seaweed BAS 4 139 Troubleshooting guide 0 eee eee 4 140 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if
591. vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle Starting and driving 5 7 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol 5 8 Starting and driving Remember drinking and driving don t mix That is true for drugs too over the counter prescrip tion and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol drugs or some other physical con
592. vice is inserted 4 98 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing push the ON OFF VOL control knob to restart the USB memory a lt gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK Reverse or Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT 4 rewind button or TRACK gt fast forward button for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an in creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the audio file re turns to normal play speed 144 gt gt SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the SEEK CAT button M4 while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M4 several times to skip backward several tracks Press the TRACK button I while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the TRACK button P several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played Folder selection To change to another folder in the USB memory turn the TUNE FOLDER knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen RPT RDM button When the RPT
593. w Monitor on and select the Display key Select one of the items and change the value by touching the or key or by turning the NISSAN controller Do not adjust the Brightness Tint Color Con trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving Make sure the park ing brake is firmly applied OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to the R Reverse position the display screen auto matically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard When the view is switched the display im ages on the screen may be displayed with some delay When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light is directly coming on the camera objects may not be displayed clearly This is not a malfunction Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual color of the objects This is not a malfunction Objects on the monitor may not be clear ina dark environment This is not a malfunction If dirt rain or snow accumulates on the cam era the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly Clean the camera Do not use alcohol
594. w the current menu option To select the current menu option press the PHONE SEND _ button To go back to the previous menu press the PHONE END button If the current menu is the Main Menu pressing the PHONE END 4 button will exit the Phone system To exit the manual control mode press and hold the PHONE END 4 button for 5 seconds Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 139 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands in this section 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too System fails to interpret the command correctly i SA i i y p y noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Voice Adaptation VA mode in this section 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what wa
595. way from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 62 Instruments and controls 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This pro
596. wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance AWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex
597. wever if the occupant takes his her weight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passen ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if
598. wheel audio control switch 4 112 Stoplight o coe aa eee ede ees ee a a 8 27 Storage see sa Pee a 2 44 Storage Pins q e gie oe tas d teg Bae e pen 2 50 Sunglasses case ooo 2 45 Sunglasses holder aoaaa a 2 45 Sunroof see Moonroof 2 53 SUN VISOMS 3 3 5 ss et A A a p 3 31 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 64 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 64 2 14 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 56 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 64 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSIEM i ke sok ea Se DA ae eA aad 1 49 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 49 Switch Autolight switch 2 33 Automatic power window switch 2 53 Fog light switch 00 2 36 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 2 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 32 Headlight control switch 2 32 Power door lock switch 3 6 Power inverter switch 2 41 10 6 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIG ar oo hg eee Batt whe 2 31 Rear window wiper and washer SWICHES e hu dee ale a a RR Glee 2 30 Turn signal switch 2 2 eae 2 35 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 41 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 29 T Tachometer 464 ecas reaa EE 2 4 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start
599. will appear on the display 2 Select one of the following options to make a call Vehicle Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook Handset Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the handset phonebook Call History Select the name from the in coming or outgoing call history Dial Number Input the phone number manu ally using a keypad displayed on the screen For information on how to use the touch screen see How to use the touchscreen in this section For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except Dial Number dialing commences when the listed name is selected Dialing commences when OK is selected if the number is input ted manually The screen changes to the Call in Progress screen After the call is over perform one of the following to finish the call a Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress screen b Press the switch on the steering wheel c When the Call in Progress screen is displayed press the button on the instrument panel to hang up If any other screen is currently displayed press the button to display the Call in Progress screen first then press the button again to hang up 4 148 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Incoming Call amp a Answer 0 00 Hold Call 8 XXXXXXXX Reject Call XXXXXXXX
600. without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may af fect the Intelligent Key system operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 A CAUTION e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle e Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the
601. y 7 ft 2 m Green line approximately 10 ft 3 m SAA1896 Rearview Vehicle width guide lines Indicate the vehicle width when backing up Predictive course lines Indicate the predictive course when operating the vehicle The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph 10 km h Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 NOTE When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 de grees or less from the neutral position both the right and left predictive course lines are displayed When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn LHA2547 Bird eye view The bird eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle po sition and the predicted course to a parking space The vehicle icon shows the position of the vehicle Note that the distance between objects viewed in the bird eye view differs from the actual distance The areas that the cameras cannot cover are indicated in black After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the
602. y hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course There may be a small distance visible between the vehicle and the object in the bird eye view on the display Backing up behind a projecting object The position is shown farther than the position in the display However the position is actually at the same distance as the position The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position if the object projects over the actual backing up course Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY With the ignition switch in the ON position press the CAMERA button or move the shift selector to the R Reverse position to operate the Around View Monitor The Around View Monitor displays different split screens views depending on the position of the shift selector Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views If the shift selector is in the R Reverse position the available views are Rearview bird eye view split screen Rearview front side view split screen If the shift selector is in the P Park position the available views are Front view bird eye view split screen Front view front side view split screen If the shift selector is in the D Drive position the only available view is front view front side view split screen When the shift selector is not in the R Reverse position and the vehicle speed increases a
603. y recognizing This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system Recent Calls Main Menu Recent Calls Outgoing Incoming Missed Use the Recent Calls command to access out going incoming or missed calls Outgoing Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle Incoming Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle Missed Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered Connect Phone NOTE The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Connect Phone Add Phone Select Phone Delete Phone Turn Bluetooth OFF Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth function on the vehicle Add Phone Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle See Connecting procedure in this section for more information Select Phone Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select Only one phone can be active at a time Monitor climate audio phone and vo
604. y se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Removing or modifying the front pas senger seat may affect the function of the air bag and result in serious per sonal injury e Modifying or tampering with the front Passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper Operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor weight sensor e No unauthorized changes should be made t
605. ying and the iPod is connected press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode Now Playing Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts LHA1398 Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod interface Use the NISSAN controller and the BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings The touchscreen can also be used to control your favorite settings The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Now Playing Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle Songs The following keys shown on the screen are also available MENU returns to the previous screen e Pll plays pauses the music selected iPod gt Play Mode 8 00 Shuffle Songs Repeat All Audiobooks Normal LHA1315 Play mode While the iPod is playing touch the Menu key to display the iPod menu Touch the Play Mode key to display the Play Mode screen and adjust the settings for Shuffle Repeat and Audio books For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the 4 SEEK CAT button or P TRACK button is pressed for less than
606. ying the voice command list available only in Alternate Command Mode Press the button listen for the tone and say Help The system will respond by display ing the command list main menu Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 165 Information gt Command List 8 00 Phone Commands Navigation Commands Information Commands Audio Commands Help Commands Push the TALK switch to start Voice Recognition 8 00 Information Fuel Economy Weather Info Maintenance Map Update Navigation Version Where am I l Traffic Info Others Show distance to empty and fuel economy Information gt Command List 8 00 Phone Commands Navigation Commands Information Commands Audio Commands Help Commands Push the TALK switch to start Voice Recognition LHA1342 LHA1231 LHA1342 Only manual controls such as the touchscreen 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument 5 Select a category using the NISSAN con can navigate the command list menu panel troller The command list for the category As an alternative to the voice command Help 2 Select the Others key using the NISSAN selected ie snowht you may access the command list using the fol controller 6 If necessary scroll the screen using the lowing steps 3 Select the Voice Recognition key using the NISSAN contro
607. ystem ABS warning light BRAKE Brake warning light Charge warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light Power steering warning light Seat belt warning light and chime CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on E7 Brake rO OQ 4 Po A 2 10 Instruments and controls eo A Supplemental air bag warning light AWD 4WD warning light if so equipped ESA ree OFF Front fog light indicator light if so equipped Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light blue C Malfunction Indicator Light MIL O D OFF Overdrive off indicator light if so equipped The following lights come on briefly and then go off ABS amp f KOR If any light fails to come on it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired promptly 1 OF e Security indicator light f Slip indicator light Tow mode ON indicator light if so equipped Turn signal hazard indicator lights J Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light he 4WD AUTO indicator light if so equipped awo LOCK AWD LOCK indicator light if so equipped WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display la
608. ystem or wear the head phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to ve hicle operation e Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death ACAUTION e Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction e While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee com plete functionality of all VIDEO CD formats LHA1376 Playing a DVD DISC AUX button Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Press the DISC AUX button until the DVD mode is active on the display When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed auto matically Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX button is pressed while a DVD is playing The operation screen will turn off auto matically after a period of time To turn it on again press the DISC AUX button DVD operation keys When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown you may use
609. ystems 4 11 Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will go out Settings gt Time Zone 12 00 UP a Pacific Mountain i Central p Eastern Atlantic A 1 9 DOWN Manually select time zone LHA0933 Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone indicator light will illuminate for that location e Pacific Mountain e Central e Eastern Atlantic 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Newfoundland Aleutian Hawaii Alaska Adjust Clock Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 12 00 Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 e UP a iiai E Auto Interior Illumination Selective Door Unlock Z Auto Headlights Sensitivity I Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Z p p Auto Headlights Off Delay ie E Lift Steering Wheel on Exit z Speed Sensing Wiper Interval z Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit o ON E i i Selective Door Unlock i Return All Settings to Default E 179 DOWN F 5 9 DOWN F Select OK to accept the time ch
610. zard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire it indicates that the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions If there is interference from an external device or transmitter The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys tem There is a malfunction in the horn or haz ard indicators 5 6 Starting and driving The identification code of the tires pres sure sensor is not registered to the sys tem The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference move the ve hicle about 3 ft 1 m backward or forward and try again If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working use a tire pressure gauge ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles They have higher ground clearance than passen ger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on pavement and off road applications This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems However they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles a

2013 Nissan Pathfinder

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents